You are on page 1of 240

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM (AHRS)

LCR-100 PART NO. 145130-xxxx

INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION July 2011

DOCUMENT NO. 145130-0000-840 REV G ECO: 1009144

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH Loerracher Strasse 18 D-79115 Freiburg i. Br. PO Box 774 D79007 Freiburg i. Br. Tel.: ++49 761 4901 0 Fax: ++49 761 4901 480 www.northropgrumman.litef.com

INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM LCR-100 PART No. 145130-xxxx

July 2011

© 2011 Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH All rights reserved, including the right to copy, distribute and translate. No part of this document may be reproduced without the express prior written consent of Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH, not even for archive purposes and e.g. may not be made use of, reproduced or disseminated by use of electronic means.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G

TP1 July 2011

145130-0000-312 has preference. The system is mechanized as a strap down inertial measurement system using fiber optic rate sensors and micro-mechanic accelerometers which are ‘strapped down’ to the principle aircraft axes. The LCR-100 is certified to ETSO C3d. The LCR-100 provides the data in ARINC 429 format. which are typically used for flight control and pilot displays. After a gyrocompassing the system operates in navigation mode like an Inertial Reference System (IRS) in which it provides free inertial navigation position and velocity outputs additionally to the basic AHRS functions. pitch and roll attitude. The LCR-100 Gyrocompass versions are equipped with inertial grade instruments which enable a gyrocompassing heading alignment. intended to be a substitute of the Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH LCR-92 and LCR-93 systems. A digital computer mathematically integrates the rate and acceleration data to obtain heading. Based on true airspeed and GNSS data input. C6d. The LCR-100 also provides an attitude mode in which it provides operational modes and performance of a standard AHRS (ARINC 705). heading and flight dynamics (body rates and accelerations) information. the LCR-100 also outputs hybrid position and velocity data with high accuracy and bandwidth.g.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1 General The LCR-100 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) is an all attitude inertial sensor system which provides aircraft attitude. This version uses an external magnetic sensor unit (MSU) for heading alignment and augmentation and does not provide gyrocompassing alignment and navigation functions. This document may be altered by Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH's sole discretion. wind direction and wind speed will be calculated. Page 1 July 2011 . There is also a LCR-100 variant available which uses the attitude mode only. During long term GNSS outages and disturbances the hybrid data will be calculated free inertial with the defined accuracy and drift. C4c. C6d and TSO C3d. NOTE In case of conflict Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH LCR-100 System Specification No. If GNSS data from an external GNSS receiver are available. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G INTRO. In this mode magnetic heading can be aligned and augmented by a magnetic sensor unit. synchro interfaces). Augmented by air data the system also provides filtered inertial altitude and vertical velocity. C5f. C5e. Optionally the attitude and heading reference data can be provided by analogue interfaces (e. C4c.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G INTRO. condition or statement which makes the job easier or directs a user through a procedure. condition or statement which. practice. could result in injury or death to personnel.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2 How important information is shown Warnings. CAUTION An operation or maintenance procedure. if not strictly observed. practice. could result in damage or destruction of equipment or loss of equipment effectiveness. Caution and Notes used in this manual emphasize the following important information: WARNING An operation or maintenance procedure. Page 2 July 2011 . condition or statement which. if not strictly observed. NOTE An essential operating or maintenance procedure.

2-xxx and -3000): the MSU is optional.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 AHR U ID M M S U (F L U X -V A L V E ) O U T L IN E D R A W IN G S N O T T O S C A L E C C U (O p tiona l) L IT 0 00 0 3 R2 For Gyrocompass-AHRS (LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1xxx. Page 3 July 2011 . Figure 1 LCR–100 Attitude and Heading Reference System Frontispiece AHRU Drawing shows P/N 145130-7xxx. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G INTRO.

Page 4 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G INTRO.

Page 1/2 July 2011 . namely: SECTION 1 installation instructions SECTION 2 description and operation SECTION 3 initial installation & testing & troubleshooting/ LCR-100 Maintenance Set SECTION 4 removal and installation of AHRU SECTION 5 storage/packaging/transportation Each section is divided into paragraphs and sub-paragraphs. For a more comprehensive listing refer to the Table of contents. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G PREFACE.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 The LCR-100 Installation/Maintenance Instruction is compiled of five main sections.

.

ISSUE DATE DATE INSERTED BY 1) L = Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G ROR. A B C D E F G ISSUE DATE Mar 2007 April 2007 Aug. Page 1/2 July 2011 . 2007 Oct. 2008 July 2009 July 2011 DATE INSERTED Mar 2007 April 2007 August 2007 October 2007 October 2008 July 2009 July 2011 BY (1) L L L L L L L REV NO. 2007 Oct.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 RECORD OF REVISIONS REV NO.

.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS TEMPORARY REV NO. PAGE NO. Page 1/2 July 2011 . ISSUE DATE BY DATE REMOVED BY DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G RTR.

.

SB-LCR-100-001 (145130-0001-845) ISSUE ISSUE 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE A ISSUE B ISSUE A ISSUE A ISSUE A ISSUE A TITLE LCR-100 Software Upgrade to MOD 18 Attitude Error after Alignment on Ground (B-290 leak tightness) Automatic Tray Misalignment Compensation with L1MS MSU Reference Fail False Inertial Magnetic Velocities output Introduction of improved LCR-100 production standard MOD20 Change of Max. Page 1/2 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 SERVICE BULLETIN LIST SERVICE BULLETIN NO. Power Indication on AHRU Label LCR-100 product improvement. MOD 23 DATE (1) 06/11/08 07/21/08 07/28/09 08/30/09 08/18/09 08/25/09 12/07/10 06/30/11 SIL-LCR-100-002 (145130-0002-845) SIL-LCR-100-003 (145130-0003-845) SIL-LCR-100-004 (145130-0004-845) SIL-LCR-100-005 (145130-0005-845) SIL-LCR-100-006 (145130-0006-845) SIL-LCR-100-008 (145130-0008-845) SIL-LCR-100-009 (145130-0009-845) 1) American Format of Date (Month/Day/Year) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SBL.

.

Section 5 Storage/Packaging/Transportation Report of possible Data Error (REPORT) 5001 through 5004 1/2 4001 through 4006 3001 through 3042 2001 through 2046 1001 through 1096 1 through 4 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1 through 2 1 through 4 1 through 6 1 through 4 PAGE DATE July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 July 2011 DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G LEP. Section 1 Installation Instructions Title Page.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES SECTION (SUBHEADING) Title Page (TP) Introduction (INTRO) Preface Record of Revisions (ROR) Record of Temporary Revisions (RTR) Service Bulletin List (SBL) List of Effective Pages (LEP) List of Illustrations (LOI) List of Tables (LOT) Table of Contents (TOC) List of Abbreviations Title Page. Section 2 Description and Operation Title Page. Section 4 Removal/Installation of AHRU Title Page. Page 1/2 July 2011 . Section 3 Initial Installation & Testing & Troubleshooting Title Page.

.

.......... 1086  Interconnection Diagram CCU..... 3005  Adapter Tray LCR-100 ..................................................... 3002  Connecting variant 1: LCR-100 UUT with L1MS Base Version ........ 1069  AHRU Outline ....................................................... 2013  L1MS Base Version ........................................... 2002  Mounting Tray without fan (Example) .... 4003  Removal of the AHRU .......... 4001  Installation of the AHRU .................. 1082  Mounting Tray P/N 140691-0000 Outline – with Fan ............. 1084  Mounting Tray P/N 144200-0000 Outline – with Fan ............... 3004  Connecting variant 2: LCR-100 UUT with L1MS Base Version ............................. 3018  Lever Arms from AHRU to the A/C Center of Gravity (Example) ...................... 1075  KMT 112 MSU Outline and Mounting Diagram ......................................... 1061  Compass Swing..............g.............................................................. 2005  Mode Transition Diagram for Gyrocompass AHRS .......................... 1077  FX-125/220 MSU Outline and Mounting Diagram ..................................................... 1011  Examples of a typical Wiring of a Discrete Output........................ 1081  Mounting Tray P/N 124260-0000 Outline – without Fan .......... 3008  L1MS GC-Tool Option .................. 1021  Synchro Output Voltage as Function of Synchro Load.........Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 List of Illustrations Figure Figure 1-1  Figure 1-2  Figure 1-3  Figure 1-4  Figure 1-5  Figure 1-6  Figure 1-7  Figure 1-8  Figure 1-9  Figure 1-10  Figure 1-11  Figure 1-12  Figure 1-13  Figure 1-14  Figure 1-15  Figure 1-16  Figure 1-17  Figure 1-18  Figure 1-19  Figure 1-20  Figure 1-21  Figure 2-1  Figure 2-2  Figure 2-3  Figure 2-4  Figure 2-5  Figure 2-6  Figure 2-7  Figure 3-1  Figure 3-2  Figure 3-3  Figure 3-4  Figure 3-5  Figure 3-6  Figure 3-7  Figure 3-8  Figure 3-9  Figure 3-10  Figure 4-1  Figure 4-2  Figure 4-3  Title Page Principal Interface Block Diagram of the LCR-100 ......................................................................... 2008  Alignment Times for Gyrocompassing..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2007  Mode Transition Diagram for Standard AHRS .......................... System Warn ................................................................................................................. Page 1 July 2011 .............................................................................................. 1095  Installation Data Module (IDM) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... LCR-100 ............................................................................................................... 4005  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G LOI....................................... 1079  Mounting Tray P/N 145137-0100 Outline – without Fan .. 1095  Shield Termination of Connectors using Metal Backshell / Strain Relief Method.................. 1078  CCU Outline and Mounting Diagram .......................................... 1083  Mounting Tray P/N 144201-0000 Outline – without Fan .......................................................................................... 1009  Mounting Positions of AHRU ........................ 3009  AHRU principle mounting on the Mounting Tray ................... 3006  Connecting Variant 1: LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS with L1MS ..... 3007  Connecting Variant 2: LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS with L1MS ................................. 3013  Lever Arms from AHRU to GNSS antennas (Example) .................................. 1094  Interconnection Diagram for Control Discretes ..................................................................................................... 1080  Mounting Tray P/N 145138-0100 Outline – with Fan ............................................................................. e............................................................................................................................................. 2003  Magnetic Sensor Unit (Example) ..................................................... 2004  Compass Control Unit ............. 3020  Fixing Torque for Connectors ... 1076  FX-120/FX-600/FV-1 MSU Outline and Mounting Diagram .............................................................................................. 1074  Front View of AHRU .................................. 1085  IDM P/N 124282-xxxx Outline ..............................................................

........Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Figure 5-1  Figure 5-2  Packaging of Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices ..... 5003  Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Device Labels (typical examples) ..................... 5004  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G LOI....... Page 2 July 2011 .......

.......................................................................................................................... 1013  ARINC Update Rate .............. ....................................... 1003  Available L1MS versions ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 1028  GNSS Sensor Status Word (Label 273) (only LCR-100 P/N 1451301003) ........................................................... 1013  MSU Excitation Voltage Select .............................................................................................................. 1026  Label 130 on GNSS Data Input (only LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1003) ................... 1027  GNSS Sensor Operational Mode (from Table 1-34) .......Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 List of Tables Table Table 1-1  Table 1-2  Table 1-3  Table 1-4  Table 1-5  Table 1-6  Table 1-7  Table 1-8  Table 1-9  Table 1-10  Table 1-11  Table 1-12  Table 1-13  Table 1-14  Table 1-15  Table 1-16  Table 1-17  Table 1-18  Table 1-19  Table 1-20  Table 1-21  Table 1-22  Table 1-23  Table 1-24  Table 1-25  Table 1-26  Table 1-27  Table 1-28  Table 1-29  Table 1-30  Table 1-31  Table 1-32  Table 1-33  Table 1-34  Table 1-35  Table 1-36  Table 1-37  Table 1-38  Table 1-39  Table 1-40  Table 1-41  Table 1-42  Title Page AHRU Versions ....................................................................................... 1006  Discrete Logic ..................................................... 1004  Power Consumption .............................................................. 1003  Installation Kit versions .......................................... 1029  ARINC 429 Inputs from CDU/FMS ....... 1024  GNSS Data Input for LCR-100-System with P/N 145130-1002................................................... 1005  Connectors Configuration ................................................................ 1025  Label 130 on GNSS Data Input (all LCR-100 except 145130-1003) ............................................................... 1022  Digital Air Data Input......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1004  Weight of AHRS Components .. Page 1 July 2011 ........................................................................................................ 1031  ARINC 429 DADS Select Command .......... 1012  Ground/Air Logic Select..................... 1010  Source Destination Identifier ................................................................ 1016  Attitude Mode Select ................................................................................................... 1024  GNSS Data Input ...... 1026  GNSS Sensor Status Word (Label 273) (all LCR-100 except 1451301003) ......................................................................... 1010  Mounting Position Discretes .............................. 1003  Correlation AHRU MOD Status to Software Version ........................................................... 1012  ARINC Turn Rate Select ...................................................... 1022  SSM Designation for ARINC 429 Input Labels ................................................................................... 1013  Yaw Rate Scale Factor Select ................. 1023  DADS Status Input Label 350...... 1017  Discrete Output.... 1014  Control Discretes .......................................... 1019  ARINC 429 Inputs................................. 1012  DG Mode Logic Select......................................................................................................................... 1002  Available MSU versions............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1001  Available IDM versions .................................................. 1029  GNSS Sensor Operational Mode (from Table 1-37) .................. 1015  DADS Input Select..................................... 1002  Available Mounting Trays ..... 1002  Available CCU versions .................................................................................................................................. 1027  GNSS Sensor Operational Mode (from Table 1-34) for P/N 1451303000 only ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1028  GNSS Sensor Type (from Table 1-37) .................................................................................................. 1030  Command Discrete (Label 275)............................................................................................................................................................ 1005  System Power provided by AHRU............................ 1032  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G LOT........................................

....................... 1036  ARINC 429 Hybrid Data Output (24) ....................... 1087  Pin Assignment J2 Fan Supply ............................................................................................... 1049  Input Discrete Word 1 (Label 303) ......................................................... 1042  Configuration Discrete Word 2 (Label 156) ........... 1060  2 Wire AC Outputs ........... 1038  ARINC 429 Hybrid Data Output for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002..................... 1033  SDI Bit Setting .. 1047  GPSSU Validity ........................................ 1039  System Discrete Word 4 (Label 151) ........................................................... -7001 and -7100) .......................... 1065  Discrete Selftest Outputs......................................... 1088  Pin Assignment J3 Synchro Interface Module............. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1046  Hybrid Status Word (Label 274) ................... 1042  Configuration Discrete Word 1 (Label 155) ................................ 1059  Synchro Outputs................................................................... ... 1064  Analogue Selftest Outputs........................................................................... .................................................. 1043  Alignment Status Bit Assignment .. 1048  GPSSU Validity Only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002....................................................................................... 1033  ARINC 429 AHRS Data Output ............ N/A for LCR-100 P/N 1451301001............................................................... 1046  Main Mode Bit Assignment (from Table 1-58) ............... 1053  SSM Indication of IRS Data depending on System mode . Page 2 July 2011 . 1035  ARINC 429 IRS Data Output . 1047  Hybrid Operational Modes..................... 1054  SSM Indication of Hybrid and GNSS Data depending on System Mode . ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1048  Hybrid Status Word (Label 274) Only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002............................... -7001 and -7100) ..... -6200.............. 1044  System Discrete Word 1 (Label 270)................. 1055  Required Augmentation Data for valid AHRS Data Output .......................... 1091  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G LOT...................................................... -6200. 1065  Pin Assignment J1 Power Supply ............ 1042  System Discrete Word 5 (Label 152) ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1058  Vertical GNSS Augmentation data ................................................ 1051  System Input Status Word (Label 356) .................................................................................. 1058  Horizontal GNSS Augmentation data ...................... 1049  Hybrid Operational Modes Only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 1451301002............ 1044  System Discrete Word 2 (Label 271)(all LCR-100 versions............................................................................................................................................................ 1050  Input Discrete Word 2 (Label 304) .......................................... 1052  SSM Indication of AHRS Data depending on System Mode .................................................................... 1042  System Discrete Word 1 (Label 270)................................................................................................................. 1089  Pin Assignment J4............................................ 1057  Required Augmentation Data for valid Hybrid Data Output........................................................... 1056  Required Augmentation Data for valid IRS Data Output ............................................................................................. 1045  Main Mode Bit Assignment (from Table 1-56) ............. 1062  MSU (Flux Valve) Interconnections ............................................................................................... except 145130-6002............................. 1045  System Discrete Word 2 (Label 271)(only for LCR-100 versions with P/N 145130-6002..................................................................................................... Only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1001..........................Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Table 1-43  Table 1-44  Table 1-45  Table 1-46  Table 1-47  Table 1-48  Table 1-49  Table 1-50  Table 1-51  Table 1-52  Table 1-53  Table 1-54  Table 1-55  Table 1-56  Table 1-57  Table 1-58  Table 1-59  Table 1-60  Table 1-61  Table 1-62  Table 1-63  Table 1-64  Table 1-65  Table 1-66  Table 1-67  Table 1-68  Table 1-69  Table 1-70  Table 1-71  Table 1-72  Table 1-73  Table 1-74  Table 1-75  Table 1-76  Table 1-77  Table 1-78  Table 1-79  Table 1-80  Table 1-81  Table 1-82  Table 1-83  Table 1-84  Table 1-85  SSM Designation for ARINC 429 Output Labels .......................... ....

. 3040  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G LOT.......................... 1093  AHRU/MSU Wiring ................................... 2038  Position drift after GNSS loss according DO-316 ..... 2042  Environmental Requirements according RTCA DO160-E ..................................................................................... 3003  Parts List L1MS Base Version with GC-Tool Option ............................................Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Table 1-86  Table 1-87  Table 1-88  Table 1-89  Table 2-1  Table 2-2  Table 2-3  Table 2-4  Table 2-5  Table 2-6  Table 2-7  Table 2-8  Table 2-9  Table 2-10  Table 2-11  Table 2-12  Table 2-13  Table 2-14  Table 2-15  Table 2-16  Table 2-17  Table 2-18  Table 3-1  Table 3-2  Table 3-3  Table 3-4  Table 3-5  Table 3-6  Table 3-7  Table 3-8  Table 3-9  Table 3-10  Pin Assignment J5 ................ 3029  Maintenance Discrete Word 2 (Label 351) ............ 2002  Startup time ............ Page 3 July 2011 ..................................................................... 2011  AHRS Alignment Times under Motion Conditions ................................................ 2043  Peak levels for modulation according to Category K ................................................................................................ 3031  Maintenance Discrete Word 4 (Label 353) ......................................... 3038  DITS SSM Failure Annunciation ..................................... 2037  Hybrid Navigation Accuracy .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2014  Position Initialization Priority .................................................. 2044  Overview L1MS Versions ...................................................................................................... 1094  Interconnection CCU Panel Light Voltage .................................................................. 1094  Installation data that can be stored in the IDM ........................................................................................ 2034  Attitude Accuracy.......................................... 2033  Static / Dynamic Conditions........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3032  Test Catalogue and Fault Reaction ..................... 2034  Heading Accuracy ..................................................... 3030  Maintenance Discrete Word 3 (Label 352) .................. 2041  Limitations for Gyrocompassing and Navigation Mode ..................................................... 2039  Northern and Southern Magnetic Variation Cutouts .... 2029  Conditions for DADS data to be set valid ............................................................... 3006  Parts List L1MS GC Tool Option .......................................................................................................... 3006  Maintenance Discrete Word 1 (Label 350) .......................... 3002  Parts List L1MS Base Version ................................................................... 1092  Pin Assignment J6 ................................................................................. 2036  Vertical Navigation Accuracy ................ 2035  Angular Rates and Acceleration Accuracy ............... 2039  Position drift after GNSS loss after dynamic operation ......................... 2036  Inertial Navigation Accuracy .......

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G LOT. Page 4 July 2011 .

.........8  2  3  3...........................................................................................................3  Control Discretes .. 1004  Location ...............5  1.............1......................... 1008  4..................... 1002  Mounting Tray Overview ........................ 1010  4............................. 1002  Magnetic Sensor Unit (MSU) Overview ......................................................................... 1008  Title Page SECTION 1 4  Interfaces . 1004  Weights .........2...1............................. 1008  4........ 1003  Correlation MOD Status to System Software Version....................6  1.....2  1....6  1...................................................................................................................................................................1......................................................1  1.......1...................3................................................. 1001  Installation Data Module (IDM) Overview ...............3  1........................................... 1006  Bonding ............ 1010  4...................... 1015  4....................................................................... 1001  Configurations Overview ............ 1005  Power ..3  Digital Interfaces .......... 1022  4..................... 1007  Control Discretes ..............................1  1.......... 1  How important information is shown ......1.....................................................................................7  1.............................. 1007  Program Pins ................................................................................................... 1022  4............. 1002  Compass Control Unit (CCU) (optional) Overview .........................1......................................2.......................................................................2  DADS Input.....................................................7  1............................... 1023  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G TOC...............................................................................1..................................................................... 1007  LED.......................3.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................4  1................ Page 1 July 2011 ................2  Discrete Interfaces ....................2.................................... 1006  Insulation Resistance................................2  Program Pins ...........................................................1...................... 1022  4...................... 2 Installation Data and General Information ...................... 1006  Wiring ............................................................................................ 1001  AHRU Versions Overview.............................................1.........................................................................................1  Digital Input... 1003  Installation Kit for AHRU (Connector Set) ..... 1010  4...............................3...........................................................................................................3  3...............................1...........................1  Interface Diagram .........................1  3............3  1.....................................2.............................................1  ARINC 429 Input ...........................................5  1............................................................................... 1007  Program Pins and Other Discretes ..............................2  1........................ 1003  Level 1 Maintenance Set (L1MS) .............. 1007  Mode Button ..........................................................................................2.................................Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Table of Contents Paragraph INTRODUCTION 1  2  1  1.................................... 1010  4.....................4  General ....... 1019  4.....1...............................................1...... 1005  Connectors .....1  Discrete Input .......................................2  3...............................................................................................4  1............2  Discrete Output .......1  General ............................

......................................... 1060  4.............3  7................................ 1062  4...3  Ethernet ...3  Hybrid Data ..............1............4  Notes to ARINC output tables: ....... 1065  Normal Acceleration Test Enable ....3....4...........................................................................................1.2....................... 1064  4..................................2.1  Synchro Output ................2...........................................................1  8.............................................................................2  Analog Output ..................1  Selftest Outputs .................................................6  Test Interface ..............................2..............................................2.......3.................................... 1064  4.........................................................6  DITS Status Indication .... 1032  4.4  Analog Interfaces ...................5  Time Mark .................................. 1036  4.......3.............................................1  MAG Heading Slaving Error .....1  Analog Input ........................... 1064  4.....1  AHRS Data .................................................................................................. 1060  4.......................1  7.... Page 2 July 2011 ............................................2  Digital Output ........3  GNSS Input .........4..............................................................................2.................................................3............ 1037  4.... 1065  5  5.................................. 1066  MSU (Flux Valve) Calibration Procedure...................... 1070  MSU Calibration Procedure/Checklist by using the MSU calibration discrete ............2  8..2...............2........................................................1...... 1025  4..................3..............3......................................2................1........................5  Discrete Words .....1......................... 1062  4................................ 1072  Outline Drawings.... 1062  4... 1064  4................1............. Bendix/King Outline...............2  IRS Data ..............6..3................................................................. 1075  Magnetic Sensor Units (MSU) ...................... 1074  AHRU Front View ....................4  7... 1034  4......................................4...1  ARINC 429 Output ........................1  8...................................................................................................................4..............4.............4.......................3....3.........................2.............................1........................................................................................................................................ 1040  4.................5  MSU (Flux Valve) Interface .............. 1063  4........2  Yaw Rate DC Output ..... 1063  4...1.................................2  RS-232 ....................6.......Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.1  5...... 1052  4........................................................... 1066  Cooling Requirements ......................3..................................................3........ 1067  Compass Swing ......2..............................2  7.4.........2  2 Wire AC Output ......... 1060  4... 1060  4........................................................................................1  Synchro Reference Input .......4  Normal Acceleration DC Output .........2  8...........................................3  DC Output .........1  RS-422 ..........................................................1................................................................2  6  7  7. 1076  MSU................... 1063  4................................................................ 1071  MSU Calibration Procedure/Checklist by using the mode button on the AHRU .............................5  8  8..... 1042  4..............................................3...............................................2..................................................................................................................................2....4......4....................... 1065  Selftest Data Output on Ground .............................................2................. 1076  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G TOC...............3............................2..... 1067  General Statements and Premises .................................. 1073  AHRU ...4  Input from CDU/FMS ...........................3...........................................1..................... 1074  AHRU Outlines........4...........................................................6................................................ 1067  Index Error Compensation Procedure ..1........... 1033  4...... 1033  4................3  Turn Rate DC Output ............... 1060  4............... 1030  4............................................................1.3.................................................................................................................

............ Honeywell Outlines .......... 2002  Mounting Tray ............. 2009  AHRS Operation Mode Transitions .... with Fan (LCR-92/93 type) ...........................................3  8.......................... 2001  Description ......... 2011  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G TOC.................................................. 1079  Mounting Trays .4..7.8  9............................. without Fan (LCR-92/93 type) ... 2005  Modes of Operation ... with Fan (LCR-92/93 type) ..................6  4......................................................................................................................................... 2001  Purpose of Equipment ........1  4.....................................................................................3  MSU................................ 2006  IRS Operation Mode Transitions (Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS Systems LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1xxx..............4.......1  4.......... 1088  Signals and Pin Assignment J3 (Synchro) ........2..... 1092  Signals and Pin Assignment J6 (Input/Output and Test) ......... without Fan (LCR-100 type) ..........................9  1  2  3  4  4..................4...............................4  8...............2  5..............................4.... 1088  Signals and Pin Assignment J4 (Input/Output) ........ 1080  Mounting Tray..............................4........................................................... 2005  CCU .................. 2010  Startup ............................................................ 2001  Outline and Mounting Drawings ........................3  4.......... Page 3 July 2011 SECTION 2 ...... standard.....................6  9.............................4.......................................3  8..........................7  4.......................... 1094  Interconnection CCU/LCR-100 ...... 1080  Mounting Tray........................ 1095 General ................ 1082  Mounting Tray.......................4  9....................................................................Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8................ 1094  Shield Termination of Mating Connectors ........ 2001  Leading Particulars .. 2006  Overview and Mode Transition ............... 1077  MSU.................. 2001  IDM ..... 2003  MSU....... 2004  Control ........................... 1085  Installation Data Module (IDM) ................................ 1081  Mounting Tray................................................................................ 2011  Alignment .....................................................3  8..........................1  5..................................................................................................2  5  5.......................2  8..................2  5......................................................................................5  8............ 2005  Control and Monitoring Device ............. standard.......................................................1.... -2xxx and 3000) ....................7  9............................................................. 1083  Mounting Tray...............7.......................2... 1078  Compass Control Unit (CCU) Outlines ....................................................................4  4............................................................ 1086  System Wiring . without Fan (LCR-92/93 type) ...................................................................2  8.......................... 1090  Signals and Pin Assignment J5 (IDM) .................................... TECSTAR Outlines ............................................................... 1084  Mounting Tray........... ruggedized.............................4...............2  9.............................................................. 1087  Signals and Pin Assignment J2 (Fan Supply) ..................................... Honeywell..............................3  9.......................4  8................................................5  9.....................................................................2  4...........................................................1...................7  9  9............................. ruggedized.............................................. ruggedized...............................1  9...................5  4.................................................... 1092  AHRU/MSU Wiring ..... 1087  Signals and Pin Assignment J1 (Power Supply) ..........................6  8.................... 2001  AHRU ..1  8..........................................1  5.......................................... with Fan (LCR-100 type) . ruggedized................................................................................... 2001  Location of Units in Aircraft .......................

...................................................1  Attitude and Heading Reference Data ......................7................................................. 2014  5.................................9  Augmentation Validity .2.........................................................................2  AHRS Operation Modes.............................................................3  Slaved Heading Mode (MAG) ........................................... 2022  5.2  Index Error Compensation ........................................................5....5  6...... 2029  5......2  6.........4.............4.......................4  AHRS Heading Alignment ...3  Realignment Mode ....2  Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)...................................... 2029  5..................................... 2025  5....1  6......................3. 2023  5....4...........4  Normal Operation Modes .................................................................................................................................. Page 4 July 2011 ........................ 2034  General Definitions......................3  6... 2022  5...... 2012  5................................................4  6..............1  Normal Attitude Mode ......................................................... 2027  5......... 2015  5...........................................3.1  Digital Air Data System (DADS) ......3  Normal Acceleration Test Enable ........................1............6  System Performance .......................................................................................................................... 2034  Attitude Accuracy ..........7.....................................................1  Navigation Mode .......................... 2036  Vertical Navigation Accuracy ....................................................4....................................................... 2035  Body Rates and Acceleration Accuracy ......3  Attitude Alignment ...... 2027  5......................4....................................3.....................................................................................................................4........1  Magnetic Heading Alignment ...........................................................................3..................3  IRS Operation Modes .........4  Hybrid Navigation....................................... 2028  5........................9...........3.. 2024  5............................ 2018  5................................................................4............................... 2033  6  6................1...............................................2  Stored Heading Alignment .............4...............................6  Alignment after Short Power Interrupt (SPI) ....................................................2  Inertial Vertical Navigation ...............3  Inertial Navigation .......................................3........... 2017  5.........4  Directional Gyro Mode (DG). 2014  5................ 2011  5.......................................... 2018  5......................................................2  Basic Attitude Mode .......................Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5................................................................. 2036  Inertial Navigation Accuracy .....1....... 2023  5.7  System Input Commands ................... 2019  5...4.................3.................... 2029  5..................1  Compass Swing ..................................3................ 2015  5..............5.......4..............................4.. 2034  Heading Accuracy ... 2032  5.... 2022  5................3...................... 2033  5.....1  Gyrocompassing ..........................................................5  IRS Heading Alignment ....1  Initialization Commands .......................................1  General ........ 2019  5....................................................................................................3.......................................................................2  Attitude Mode ....................................6  Power Down .....................5..5  MSU Calibration Mode ................... 2015  5....3.................................................................................................................................... 2028  5. 2014  5...2................................................................3...........2  Alignment Times ...............................2.....5.9.......... 2033  5...1...................................................... 2036  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G TOC....4........................ 2031  5............7...........................................................4.........................................4....................................................1  General Functions ..8  Maintenance Test Mode.....4.................................................................... 2026  5............................4......2  Discrete / ARINC 429 Commands .............3. 2024  5................................................. 2017  5.......................................2  Magnetic Heading Initialization (DG Mode) ..... 2018  5......................... 2020  5.............................2....

........................................ Page 5 July 2011 ....................1  1......................................3  Alignment Procedure ......3................. 2041  Limitations for Gyrocompassing and Free Inertial Navigation ..................................................................................3  Hybrid Navigation Accuracy ........................................................................................................................................... 2045 NG LITEF L1MS Maintenance Set...........3...............2  7.......3....... 2040  Latitude Limitations for Heading .................2. 2039  Operating Limitations .........................5  7..................................3  7.............................1  1....1............... 3015  2.................................................6  8  9  9............................................................ 3011  Mounting Screws ...........2  Manual Tray Alignment Procedure ............. 3010  Installation of Mounting Tray .... Roll and Yaw (Heading) ....................................3.............................. 2045  Short Power Interrupt........2  2  2............................................................1  Preconditions ........... 3017  2......2  7...................................... 3001  ITEM LIST ...1......... 3011  Mounting Tolerance and Tray Alignment .............1  2........ 3012  Determination and Compensation of Tray Misalignment by means of the LCR-100 and the L1MS ....................................................... 3010  Mounting and Base-Plate Recommendations.....................................................................................................................................................................................1  7............3.................................................... 2041  Velocity Limitation .......................................................................................2......... 2037  Hybrid Navigation after loss of GNSS augmentation (Coasting Operation) .......................................... 3009  Applicable Documents for L1MS.........................................4  Tray Alignment procedure to determine Tray Misalignment Compensation Values for Pitch and Roll only ....1  7..... 2041  AHRS operation .......................................................................................2  7. 3015  2..............4.......... 3006  Commercial Parts .......................... 2041  Limitations on Aerobatic Flights and Continuous Turns ..................2  9.........................2....4  7... 2040  Angular Rates and Body Accelerations ...........................2.................Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 6....2.....1...................................... 3014  2.................................................1............. 3012  Tray mounting and alignment steps ............................. 3002  L1MS Base Version .............................3.......................................3  1  1.............................................1  7...7  6.....3............................................................................. 3012  Required accuracy for Tray Alignment.................................................................................2..........3........................................ 3014  2....... 3014  2................ 2042  Environmental Specifications according RTCA DO160-E .................2  1................................................................ 3009  SECTION 3 AHRU Alignment Requirements ......................................................................... 3014  2................ 2040  IRS Operation in Navigation Mode .........2.................. 3003  L1MS Base Version with GC Tool Option ..................2  2................................................... 2041  IRS operation in Navigation Mode ..... 3017  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G TOC........................1  2...........3  1....8  7  7............1.........................................................................2..................... 2040  AHRS Operation ................... 2042  Limitations for Vertical Navigation..............................1  Tray Alignment procedure to determine Tray Misalignment Compensation Values in Pitch.............3..................2................................1  2................................. 2043  Power Interrupts .........2  2....................................2  2............................................................................. 2045  General ........1  9.................................2  Preconditions ................................................1  Automatic Tray Alignment Procedure ............................. 2045  Long Power Interrupt .....

............2  ARINC 429 Output during Normal Operation ......................7..............................................................................................................3........3.....3.............................7..........................................7........................3  4............................................................. 5002  SECTION 4 SECTION 5 DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G TOC............................................................................ 3027  3................... 3026  3......................... 5001  Special Packaging Requirements ...................................................2  Initial AHRS and Indicator Checks ................................3.......................................... 4001  Installation of the AHRU ........................................... 3022  3.........................................................................4  Determine Lever Arms from AHRU to the GNSS antennas ..................7  Failure Indication ......................................................................4................... 3025  3.................................. Page 6 July 2011 .......................................................................................................2........................... 3039  Use of the World Magnetic Model ..............................................1  Fault Indicator ...............3......... 3026  3.................................................3........3................................................. 3026  3......................................2  Alignment Procedure ............2  4......................................... 3028  General ............. 3024  3................. 3028  Maintenance Discrete Outputs ..............6  Selftest Data Output .......................... 3027  3... 3033  DITS SSM Failure Annunciation .................................3................... 3017  2.............. 3021  3.............. 4004 General....................................................................... 5001  Storage.5  Determine Lever Arms from AHRU to the A/C Center of Gravity ................................ 3025  3......6  Maintenance Output via Test Interface ......7......... 3025  3.......5  Output of the Failure History and Elapsed Time ..............1  5  1  2  3  1  2  3  3.............. 5001  Packaging (References in accordance with ATA 300) ........................................... 3041 General......... 5002  Transportation (References in accordance with ATA 300) ...................3  Failure Logging and Malfunction Storage ................................................... 3028  AHRS Fault Monitoring Summary .......1  Initial Installation Check .......... 3027  3...................................1  4  System Integrity ...........................................3  Recommended Tools ................3........................................... 3020  3  Initial Installation ............................................................................................... 3025  3...............5  Fault is not present OR you do not have a ARINC 429 Bus reader ....................... 3018  2.........3................................. 3027  4  4...............................................................................3...........................Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2...........3..............1  4................3..........................1  General Description ....................7..............7............4  Fault is still present AND you have an ARINC 429 Bus reader ......... 3026  3............ 3025  3........................................general remarks ............4  Elapsed Time Counter ..3.... 3026  3........3......................................3  Trouble Shoot AHRS Problems ..................2  Check Fault Indicator .... 4002  Removal of the AHRU .......................................................................................

Abbreviation A/C AC Accel ADC AF AHRS AHRU AIC Alt ARINC ARW ATA ATT AUX AWG BCD Bd BIT BITE BNR CAL CalPROM CCU CCW CDU Clk CoG CW d:m:y: DAC DADS DC Deg DG DIS DITS Definition Aircraft Alternating current Acceleration Analog Digital Converter Audio Frequency Attitude and Heading Reference System Attitude and Heading Reference Unit Airborne Inhabited Cargo Altitude AERONAUTICAL RADIO. Page 1 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 List of Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in the text of this manual. INCORPORATED Airborne Rotary Winged Air Transport Association Attitude Auxiliary American Wire Gauge Binary-coded decimal Baud Built-In Test Built-In Test Equipment Binary Coded Calibration Calibration PROM Compass Control Unit Counter Clockwise Control/Display Unit Clock Center of Gravity Clockwise day:month:year Digital Analog Converter Digital Air Data System Direct Current Degrees Directional Gyro Discrete Digital Information Transfer System DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G Abbreviations.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Abbreviation EFIS E/W or E-W E²PROM ETI ETSO FMS FOM FPGA ft GBAS GC GmbH GMT GND GNSS GPS GPSSU HDG HDOP HFOM HIRF hr hrz HSI HW Hz I/O IDM IEC IFM IMI IMU indic. IRS kts L1MS Lat LIHNa LCR LOI Definition Electrical Flight Instrument System East/West or East-West Electrical Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM) Elapsed Time Indicator European Technical Standard Order Flight Management System Figure of Merit Field Programmable Gate Array feet Ground-Based Augmentation System Gyrocompass Gesellschaft mit beschränkter Haftung (limited liability corporation) Greenwich Mean Time Ground Global Navigation Satellite System Global Positioning System GPS Sensor Unit Heading Horizontal Dilution of Precision Horizontal FOM High Intensity Radiation Field hours horizontal Heading Situation Indicator Hardware Hertz Input/Output Installation Data Module Index Error Correction Interface Module Installation/Maintenance Instruction Inertial Measurement Unit indicated Inertial Reference System Knots Level 1 Maintenance Set Latitude LITEF Inertial Hybrid Navigator LITEF Commercial Reference System List of Illustrations DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G Abbreviations. Page 2 July 2011 .

C. N. NV RAM P/N PBIT PC PDOP PIC PM PROM PSM PW PWR RAIM RAM REF REV RF RMI RMS s SAV Definition Longitude List of Tables Least Significant Bit Magnetic (slaved mode) Multi Function Display minutes Most Significant Bit Mean Sea Level Magnetic Sensor Unit (Flux Valve.O. Page 3 July 2011 . Magnetometer) Mean Time Between Failure Normally Closed Normally Open Not Applicable North to South Normal Acceleration Test Enable Navigation No Computed Data Nautical mile National Oceanic & Atmospheric Administration Normal Non Volatile Random Access Memory Part Number Power up BIT Personal Computer Position Dilution of Precision Programmable Interrupt Controller Processor Module Programmable Read Only Memory Power Supply Module Power Power Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring Random Access Memory Reference Revision Radio Frequency Radio Magnetic Indicator Root Mean Square shielded Standard Applied Voltage DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G Abbreviations. N/A N/S or N-S NATE NAV NCD nm NOAA Norm.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Abbreviation Long LOT LSB MAG MFD min MSB MSL MSU MTBF N.

Page 4 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Abbreviation SB SBAS SBL SDI sec. SF SGS SIG SIL SIM SP spd SPI SRAM SSM TAS tbd Tk TOC TP ts TST TTL UTC VAC VDC VDOP vert VRTN WMM WOW YR Definition Service Bulletin Satellite-Based Augmentation System Service Bulletin List Source Destination Identifier (ARINC 429) second Scale Factor Standard Ground Signal Signal Service Information Letter Synchro Interface Module Service Pack speed Short Power Interrupt Static Random Access Memory Sign Status Matrix (ARINC 429) True Airspeed to be defined Track Table of Contents Title Page twisted and shielded Test Transistor-Transistor Logic Universal Time Coordinates (GMT) Volts A/C Current Volts-Direct Current Vertical Dilution of Precision vertical Volt Return World Magnetic Model Weight on Wheel Yaw Rate DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G Abbreviations.

: 145130-0000-840 REV G TITLE PAGE SECTION 1 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 SECTION 1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS DOCUMENT No.

.

Turn Rate also output on Label 040 Data Latency of Accels and Rates reduced to < 22 ms Pin 13: 28 VDC ref.1 Configurations Overview The LCR-100 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) consist of: Attitude and Heading Reference Unit (AHRU) Installation Data Module (IDM) Magnetic Sensor Unit (MSU) (optional) Mounting Tray (optionally with cooling fan) The following variants are available and can be arranged to a system: 1. Attitude mode annunciator discrete Synchro IF 200 mV/deg AC output Synchro IF 167 mV/deg AC output Label 215 passed through from DADS input to AHRS output. Alignment process indicator on magn.1 Feature AHRU Versions Overview Main Functions Supplem. for SGS discrete Pin 5: GND ref.1.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1 Installation Data and General Information This section contains information that will aid in the installation of the Attitude and Heading Reference System. Hdg. for SAV discrete Pin 5: 28 VDC ref. Customer Specific Features HW Modules IRS and hybrid Labels removed from output bus. for SGS discrete Pin 13: GND ref. for SAV discrete DG-mode annunciator discrete GNSS Interface ARINC 743A Hybrid data on inertial Labels Gyrocompass and navigation GNSS Interface ARINC 743 Standard AHRS functions Hybrid Navigator (LIHNa) Connector J1 Version/P/N 145130Gyrocompass AHRS -1000 -1001 -1002 -1003 -1004 -2000 -3000 -6000 -6001 -6002 -6200 -7000 -7001 -7100 Standard AHRS X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 1-1 AHRU Versions DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1001 July 2011 Connector J1 . 1.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1. The following listed IDM versions are available: Part Number of IDM 124282-0000 124282-2xxx 124282-xxxx IDM Version Standard IDM Extended IDM Customized IDM Table 1-2 Available IDM versions 1.6 The following listed MSU versions are available: Part Number of MSU 450910-2362 450910-3078 450910-3079 450910-3080 450910-6895 450910-7715 MSU Version Bendix/King KMT 112 Honeywell FX-120 Honeywell FX-125 Honeywell FX-220 Honeywell FX-600 TECSTAR FV-1 (Bendix/King P/N 071-1052-00) (Honeywell P/N 620359) (Honeywell P/N 656520) (Honeywell P/N 2594484) (Honeywell P/N 7010133) (TECSTAR P/N 2961182-1) Table 1-4 Available MSU versions DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1002 July 2011 .5. paragraph 4.1. The following listed Mounting Tray-versions are available: Part Number of Tray 145137-0100 145138-0100 145138-xxxx 124260-0000 140691-0000 144201-0000 144200-0000 Mounting Tray Version ruggedized tray ruggedized tray Customized.4 Magnetic Sensor Unit (MSU) Overview For detailed information about MSU refer to section 2. paragraph 4.2 Installation Data Module (IDM) Overview For detailed information about IDM refer to section 2. ruggedized tray standard tray standard tray ruggedized tray ruggedized tray without fan with fan with fan without fan with fan without fan with fan LCR-100 type LCR-100 type LCR-100 type LCR-92/93 type LCR-92/93 type LCR-92/93 type LCR-92/93 type Table 1-3 Available Mounting Trays 1.1.1.3 Mounting Tray Overview For detailed information about Mounting Trays refer to section 2.4. paragraph 4.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1. -2xxx and -3000) to determine Pitch.7. -2xxx and -3000) to determine Pitch. paragraph 4. black panel) CCU (5 V Lighting.1. Roll and Heading compensation data) L1MS Base Version + LCR-9x Tool option (for all LCR-100 and LCR-9x Versions to determine Pitch & Roll compensation data) L1MS Base Version + Gyrocompass Tool option + LCR-9x Tool option (for all LCR-100 and LCR-9x Versions to determine Pitch & Roll compensation data) + (for LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS (P/N 145130-1xxx.7 Level 1 Maintenance Set (L1MS) For detailed information about L1MS refer to section 3. grey panel) Installation Kit for CCU (Connector Set) Table 1-5 Available CCU versions 1.1. Kit P/N 145146-0000 P/N 145147-0000 for AHRU with Synchro Interface (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx) (full metallic housing) for AHRU without Synchro Interface (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. black panel) CCU (28 V Lighting. The following listed CCU-versions are available: Part Number of CCU 140855-0010 140855-0020 140855-0030 140855-0040 141468-0000 CCU Version CCU (5 V Lighting. paragraph 1. The following listed L1MS are available: Part Number of L1MS Version L1MS 309946-0000 309946-0500 L1MS Base Version (for all LCR-100 Versions to determine Pitch & Roll compensation data) L1MS Base Version + Gyrocompass Tool option (for all LCR-100 Versions to determine Pitch & Roll compensation data) + (for LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS (P/N 145130-1xxx.5 Compass Control Unit (CCU) (optional) Overview For detailed information about CCU refer to section 2.1.1.6 Installation Kit for AHRU (Connector Set) Installation Kit Version Part Number of Inst. grey panel) CCU (28 V Lighting. Roll and Heading compensation data) 309946-0600 309946-0700 Table 1-7 Available L1MS versions DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1003 July 2011 . -3000 and -6xxx) (full metallic housing) Table 1-6 Installation Kit versions 1.

50 kg less than 0.680 kg 0.136 kg 0.035 kg CCU (P/N 140855-0010.2 MOD 12 MOD 16 MOD 18 MOD 19 Correlation MOD Status to System Software Version System Software Version System SW 1100 System SW 1200 System SW 1300 System SW 1400 MOD Status MOD 20 MOD 22 MOD 23 System Software Version System SW 1500 System SW 1500 System SW 1600 MOD Status Table 1-8 Correlation AHRU MOD Status to Software Version 1.Component AHRU with synchro interface (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx) without synchro interface (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx.95 kg less than 2.40 kg max less than 0. -2xxx or -xxxx) Table 1-9 Weight of AHRS Components DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1004 July 2011 .680 kg 0.680 kg 0. -3000 and -6xxx) MSU KMT112 FX-120 FX-125 FX-220 FX-600 FV-1 (P/N 450910-2362) (P/N 450910-3078) (P/N 450910-3079) (P/N 450910-3080) (P/N 450910-6895) (P/N 450910-7715) 0.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1.680 kg 0.67 kg AHRS .50 kg less than 0.55 kg less than 0.65 kg less than 0.35 kg less than 0.680 kg 0.3 Weights Weight less than 2.67 kg less than 0. -0020. -0030 or -0040) Mounting Tray LCR-100 - without fan with fan (P/N 145137-0100) (P/N 145138-0100) Mounting Tray LCR-92/93 standard without fan (P/N 124260-0000) with fan (P/N 140691-0000) Mounting Tray LCR-92/93 ruggedized without fan (P/N 144201-0000) with fan (P/N 144200-0000) IDM (P/N 124282-0000.

1. The maximum power consumption of the optional cooling fan is less than 3 Watts (which is not included in Table 1-10 below). CAUTION These outputs may not be used for other than the intended purpose without the written consent of Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH engineering department.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1. The system switches on when the voltage exceeds 18 VDC. The system operates with an input voltage down to 15 VDC. electrical cables or radio equipment. and its major axes must be parallel or perpendicular to the major axes of the aircraft. 4 ms may occur. A wing tip or tail section location will usually be satisfactory.40 VRMS.5 Power The AHRU Power is designed to operate from either a primary or an auxiliary 28 VDC power input. An inrush current peak with duration of max. The CCU is installed on a panel in the cockpit.4 Location The AHRU is generally located in the aircraft’s equipment bay electronics rack. 400 Hz Table 1-11 System Power provided by AHRU The inrush current of the system is limited to 14A. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1005 July 2011 . Configuration AHRU without Synchro Interface (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. The power consumption of the AHRU is listed below. -3000 and -6xxx) AHRU with Synchro Interface (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx) Power Consumption nominal maximum 26 W 40 W 30 W 45 W Table 1-10 Power Consumption The AHRU System Power: The AHRU provides the following System power: System power Cooling fan power CCU power Magnetometer power Reference signal for SGS discretes Flux valve excitation Value + 24 VDC + 28 VDC + 28 VDC + 28 VDC 10. The MSU should be located as far away as possible from all sources of local magnetic disturbances such as engines.8 .

measured between the front part of the AHRU (e.0E-3 Ohm. 1.7 Bonding The bonding resistance between the AHRU and the aircraft structure shall be less than 5. a plastic cap should be installed on connector J2. The MSU connector is 030-2189-00 for the KMT 112 flux valve. 2) Synchro Connector 1J3 is only available for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx) The mating connectors with metric (M3) screw lock shall have metal or metallized plastic backshells. If no Fan is used. The CCU connector is M83723/72R1415N. 1. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1006 July 2011 . The metal block attached to the end of the IDM retaining cable should be permanently affixed to the Mounting Tray with the two machine screws provided. If the 5.6 Connectors The AHRU external connectors are Sub-Min-D type with metric M3 screw locks and have the following pin complements: Connector J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 Function Power Supply Fan Supply Synchro Interfaces Input/Output IDM Input/Output and Test 2) Pins/Sockets 15 p 9s 44 p 62 p 15 s 44 s Connector type M24308/4-2 not required (1) M24308/4-13 M24308/4-14 not required (1) M24308/2-13 Table 1-12 Connectors Configuration 1) No wiring is required for connector J2 (Fan Supply) and for connector J5 (IDM) because the mating connectors are integral parts of the Mounting Tray with Fan and the IDM itself.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1. connector) and the aircraft structure.0E-3 Ohm cannot be achieved (due to high impedance between tray and A/C structure) a bonding strap from the tray to the A/C shall be attached.g.8 Insulation Resistance The insulation resistance measured between all electrical circuits and the metallic case shall be at least 20 MOhm.

2. 3.2 Control Discretes For the description of the Control Discretes refer to section 1.3.1. Depending on the system state the mode button can be either used to enter the MSU calibration mode or to reset the fault indicator. This mode button is accessible from the outside and does not protrude the system housing. 3.2. The activation of the mode button is only possible by a pointed tool.2.3 Mode Button On the front of the AHRU there is a mode button (refer to Figure 1-7).1 Program Pins and Other Discretes Program Pins The following 13 AHRU connector pins are allocated for external program control: Pin J4-32 J4-14 J4-35 J4-34 J4-54 J4-12 J4-1 J4-17 J4-53 J4-11 J4-23 J4-44 J4-43 Function Program Pin Common Mounting Position No. paragraph 4. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1007 July 2011 . 3 3.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2 Wiring Wiring details are provided in paragraph 9 at the end of this section. 2 SDI 1 SDI 2 DG Mode Logic Select Ground/Air Logic Select ARINC Turn Rate Select Yaw Rate Scale Factor Select No. 1 Mounting Position No. paragraph 4. 1 Yaw Rate Scale Factor Select No.1. 2 MSU Excitation Voltage Select ARINC Update Rate Select Parity (odd) For detailed information about the Program Pins refer to section 1.

paragraph 4. wiring. (Description of MSU Calibration Mode: refer to section 2.2). paragraph 3. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1008 July 2011 .6 Interface Diagram Discrete Interfaces Digital Interfaces Analog Interfaces MSU (Flux Valve) Interface Test Interfaces 4. 4 Interfaces refer to section 1. paragraph 4. paragraph 4.5. paragraph 4.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 3. paragraph 4.g.) The flashing LED is used as fault indicator (refer to section 3.4 refer to section 1.3 refer to section 1.4 LED At the front plate there is a red LED (refer to Figure 1-7).5 refer to section 1. paragraph 4. The permanently illuminated LED indicates that the system operates in the MSU calibration mode.3.2 refer to section 1. paragraph 5. the fault indicator can be reset when the unit is switched on by pressing the Mode Button on the front side of the AHRU for minimum 2 seconds.1 refer to section 1. electrical or digital interface) or IDM and not on the AHRU.1 Interface Diagram Figure 1-1 shows the interface diagram of the LCR-100 with embedded optional synchro interface module. In case a fault is detected on A/C side (e.

PWR +24VDC Fan PWR +28VDC CCU PWR AUX PWR Annunciation 2 x Mounting Position 2 x SDI Ground /Air Logic Select ARINC Turn Rate Select 2 x YR Scale / DADS Select MSU Excitation Voltage Select DG Mode Logic Select ARINC Update Rate Select Parity Pin Program Pin Common Selftest Data enable Slew Left Slew Right DG/MAG Mode Select On GND / In Air Att Mode Select Gyrocompassing Mode Select Stored HDG Alignment Synchro True /MAG HDG Select System Warn Basic Mode Annunciator/Yaw Rate Warn Auto Pilot HDG Interlock AHRS Mode Annunciator 2 x ARINC 429 Input DADS (hi/lo speed) 2 x ARINC 429 Input GNSS (hi/lo speed) 2 x ARINC 429 Input CDU /FMS (hi/lo speed) 6 x ARINC 429 Output (hi speed ) 2 x GNSS Time Mark Input RS-422 Maintenance . Test. MSU MSU Ref . Calibration RS-232 Maintenance Ethernet Test Mode LCR -100 Attitude Synchro Ref Heading Synchro Ref 1 Heading Synchro Ref 2 Pitch Synchro Roll Synchro HDG 1 Synchro HDG 2 Synchro IDM Pitch (50 mV/deg) Roll (50 mV/deg) Pitch (200 mV/deg) Roll (200 mV/deg) Yaw Rate DC Output Turn Rate DC Output DC Normal Acceleration Normal Acceleration Test Enable Attitude Warn HDG Warn 1 HDG Warn 2 Yaw/Turn Rate Warn Optional Module Mode Button LED S1 S2 S3 Excit . PWR +28VDC aux . I/O Slaving Error DC MSU Calibration Discrete LIT00004R2 Figure 1-1 Principal Interface Block Diagram of the LCR-100 DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1009 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 +28VDC prim .

2 4. 2 (J4-35) Plug Forward open open Plug Aft jump to common (J4-32) open Plug Right Wing open jump to common (J4-32) Plug Left Wing jump to common (J4-32) jump to common (J4-32) Table 1-14 Mounting Position Discretes DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1010 July 2011 . 1 and No. 1 (J4-14) Mounting Pos.2.5 VDC Not Active R  100 kOhm R > 10 Ohm Table 1-13 Discrete Logic SGS discretes are referenced to + 28 VDC aircraft power.0 VDC Voltage < 3.1 Discrete Interfaces Discrete Input General The electrical and logic characteristic of the SAV and SGS discretes are shown in Table 113.2.1.1. 4.2 Program Pins Program Pin Common The Program Pin Common (J4-32) provides the 28VRTN signal to set the SGS program pins. Discrete Type Standard Applied Voltage (SAV) 28 VDC/Open Standard Ground Signal (SGS) GND/Open Active Lowest operation voltage up to – 36. all other program pins are SGS discretes. NOTE The ARINC Turn Rate Select Discrete is a SAV discrete.2.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4. SAV discretes are referenced to 28VRTN.1 4. Mounting Position (refer to Figure 1-2) The azimuth mounting orientation in the aircraft is identified by the Program Pins Mounting Position No. 2 as defined in the following table: Program Pin Mounting Pos.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 PLUG FORWARD PLUG AFT PLUG LEFT PLUG RIGHT LIT00035 Figure 1-2 Mounting Positions of AHRU DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1011 July 2011 .

-2000 and -145130-3000) Program Pin SDI 1 (J4-34) SDI 2 (J4-54) N/A open open System No. 1 and No. Ground/Air Logic Select (J4-1) open jump to common (J4-32) On Ground / In Air Discrete Ground in Air on Ground Open on Ground in Air Table 1-17 Ground/Air Logic Select DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1012 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Source Destination Identifier (SDI) The Source Destination Identifier in the ARINC words is set by the Program Pins SDI No. This setting is valid for: all ARINC outputs of the system ARINC input Labels 043 and 275 (only LCR-100 systems with P/N 145130-1000. 2 as defined in the following table. 1 jump to common (J4-32) open System No. 3 jump to common (J4-32) jump to common (J4-32) Table 1-15 Source Destination Identifier DG Mode Logic Select The logic of the DG/MAG Mode Select discrete is configurable by the DG Mode Logic Select program pin (J4-12) as defined in the following table. 2 open jump to common (J4-32) System No. DG Mode Logic Select (J4-12) open jump to common (J4-32) DG/MAG Mode Select 28 VDC DG Mode MAG Mode Open MAG Mode DG Mode Table 1-16 DG Mode Logic Select Ground/Air Logic Select The logic of the On Ground / In Air discrete is configurable by the Ground/Air Logic Select program pin (J4-1) as defined in the following table.

Program Pin YR Scale Factor Select 1 (J4-53) YR Scale Factor Select 2 (J4-11) Analog Yaw Rate Scale Factor 200 mV/deg/s open open 100 mV/deg/s open jump to common (J4-32) 333 mV/deg/s jump to common (J4-32) open 666 mV/deg/s jump to common (J4-32) jump to common (J4-32) Table 1-19 Yaw Rate Scale Factor Select This function is only applicable for Systems with installed Synchro Interface Module (P/N 145130-2xxx and 145130-7xxx). 301. 320. 326. 332. 1 and No. 330. 333 and 340 is selectable by the ARINC Update Rate Select Program Pin (J4-44) as defined in the following table. 2 as defined in the following table. paragraph 4.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 ARINC Turn Rate Select The content of the ARINC Label 330 and 340 is selectable to either Turn Rate or Yaw Rate by the ARINC Turn Rate Pin (J4-17) as defined in the following table. paragraph 4. MSU Excitation Voltage Select The voltage of the MSU Excitation and the adequate signal processing (refer to section 1. Otherwise these pins are used as DADS select discretes. MSU Excitation Voltage Select (J4-23) open jump to common (J4-32) MSU Excitation Voltage 23.2.5) is selectable by the MSU Excitation Voltage Select Pin (J4-23) as defined in the following table. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1013 July 2011 .5 VAC (Honeywell/Tecstar type MSU) 12. ARINC Turn Rate Select (J4-17) open + 28 VDC ARINC Output Label 330 Yaw Rate Turn Rate ARINC Output Label 340 Only valid for P/N 145130-3000 Turn Rate Yaw Rate Table 1-18 ARINC Turn Rate Select YR Scale Factor Select The scale factor of the Yaw Rate DC output (refer to section 1. 325.5 VAC (Bendix King type MSU) Table 1-20 MSU Excitation Voltage Select ARINC Update Rate Select The update rate of the ARINC Labels 040.3) of the synchro interface board is selectable by the Program Pins YR Scale Factor No. 324.4. 331. 327.

-3000 and -6xxx: Parity = + + + + + + Mounting Pos.g. 2 DG Mode Logic Select Ground/Air Logic Select ARINC Turn Rate Select YR Scale Factor 1 + YR Scale Factor 2 MSU Excitation Voltage Select ARINC Update Rate Select Parity Pin (J4-14 + J4-35) (J4-12) (J4-1) (J4-17) (J4-53 + J4-11) (J4-23) (J4-44) (J4-43) To avoid a parity warning the result of the parity calculation (including parity pin) has to be odd (e. if the parity result without parity pin is even. the pin has to be left open). Parity The setting of the program pins (except the SDI Program Pins) is checked for odd parity. The parity of the program pin setting is calculated as follows: LCR-100 Systems with P/N 145130-1xxx.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 ARINC Update Rate Select (J4-44) open jump to common (J4-32) ARINC Update Rate High Update Rate Low Update Rate Table 1-21 ARINC Update Rate Refer to Table 1-45 for further details. 1 + Mounting Pos. it is valued to 0 (zero) otherwise to 1. If a program pin is left open. 1 + Mounting Pos. 2 DG Mode Logic Select Ground/Air Logic Select ARINC Turn Rate Select MSU Excitation Voltage Select ARINC Update Rate Select Parity Pin (J4-14 + J4-35) (J4-12) (J4-1) (J4-17) (J4-23) (J4-44) (J4-43) LCR-100 Systems with P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx (LCR-100 with installed synchro interface module) Parity = + + + + + + + Mounting Pos. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1014 July 2011 . the parity pin has to be jumped to common. if the result is odd.

2.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1015 July 2011 . A GND signal on the Selftest Data Enable discrete enables the selftest mode. The input Selftest Data Enable discrete has a GND/Open (SGS) logic.1. paragraph 5). 1 & 2 Attitude Mode Select Gyrocompass Mode Select Stored Heading Alignment Synchro True/Mag HDG Select MSU Calibration Discrete Test Mode Fan Test Enable Normal Acceleration Test Enable Command Interface Select Engineering Mode Enable Pin J4-55 J4-57 J4-16 J4-58 J4-37 J4-53 J4-11 J4-04 J4-56 J4-52 J4-25 J4-38 J6-18 J2-04(A) J2-05(B) J3-36 J5-08 J5-07 TTL TTL x x Format SGS SAV SAV SAV SGS SGS SGS SGS SGS SGS SAV x x x -1xxx x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x For lab test only For lab test only Referenced to Secondary Signal Ground x x -2xxx x x x x x -3000 x x x x x x -6xxx x x x x x x -7xxx x x x x x Comment Table 1-22 Control Discretes Selftest Data Enable The Selftest Data Enable discrete sets the system in the selftest mode in which it outputs synthetic generated system data via its interfaces (refer to section 1. Control Discretes Selftest Data Enable DG/MAG Mode Select Slew Left Slew Right On Ground / in Air Discrete DADS Select No.3 Control Discretes To operate the system in different modes it provides the control discretes as defined in the following table.

2).2.2).1.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 DG/MAG Mode Select The DG/MAG Mode select discrete is a 28 VDC/Open (SAV) input that controls the system to operate either in MAG mode or in DG mode. Slew Left/Right The system has one slew left discrete and one slew right discrete.1.2 Function Automatic open open DADS No. -3000 and -6xxx). paragraph 4.2.2. Otherwise these pins are used as Yaw Rate Scale Factor Select discretes (refer to section 1. paragraph 5.1. Program Pin DADS select No. DADS Select This input is used as control discrete to select the active DADS input with the logic defined in the following table. A 28 VDC signal on the slew left or slew right discrete enables the slew function to slew the platform heading to the left (CCW) or to the right (CW) respectively as defined in section 2. 1 open GND DADS No. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1016 July 2011 . paragraph 4. paragraph 4.1 DADS select No. On GND / In Air The On Ground / In Air discrete is a GND/Open signal that indicates whether the aircraft is on ground or in air.4. 2 GND open No DADS/BASIC GND GND Table 1-23 DADS Input Select The DADS select function is only applicable for systems without synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx.4. The logic of the input is configurable by the Ground/Air Logic Select discrete (refer to section 1.2). Both slew discretes are 28 VDC/Open signals.2. The logic of the input is configurable by the DG Mode Logic Select discrete (refer to section 1.

paragraph 5. The Synchro True/Mag Heading Select discrete selects whether there is true heading or Magnetic heading output on the synchro heading channels 1 and 2. -2xxx and -3000) The Stored Heading Alignment discrete is a GND/Open signal. The Synchro True/Mag Heading Select discrete is a GND/Open signal. paragraph 5. -2xxx and -3000) The Gyrocompass Mode discrete is a GND/Open signal. -2xxx and -3000 except -1002 Attitude Mode Select Discrete 145130-1002 open GND Inactive Attitude mode selected Attitude mode selected Inactive Table 1-24 Attitude Mode Select Description of Attitude Mode: refer to section 2.3.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Attitude Mode Select Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx.2. A GND signal on the Stored Heading Alignment discrete sets the system in the Stored Heading Alignment Mode. Description of Gyrocompassing: refer to section 2. -2xxx and -3000) The Attitude Mode discrete is a GND/Open signal. A GND signal on the Gyrocompass Mode discrete sets the system in the Gyrocompass Mode. paragraph 5.5. The logic of the Attitude Mode Select Discrete is defined in the following table: 141530-1xxx. Stored Heading Alignment Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. the system outputs true heading on the heading synchro channels 1 and 2.3.2. If a GND signal applies on the Synchro True/Mag Heading Select discrete.4. Gyrocompass Mode Select Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1017 July 2011 . Synchro True/Mag Heading Select Only applicable to AHRS systems with P/N 145130-2xxx.5.1.3. Description of Stored Heading Alignment: refer to section 2.

Description of Maintenance Test Mode: refer to section 2.8. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1018 July 2011 . Description of MSU Calibration Mode: refer to section 2. Maintenance Test Mode The discrete will only be checked and accepted at power on and if the aircraft is determined to be on ground. A 28 VDC signal on the MSU Calibration Mode discrete sets the system to the MSU Calibration Mode. paragraph 5. Pin 17) and the test mode discrete input sets the system into the maintenance test mode.5. paragraph 5.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 MSU Calibration The MSU Calibration Mode discrete is a 28 VDC/Open signal.g. Fan Test Enable A jumper between the power supply pins J2-04/05 enables the fan current monitoring on the PSM. The input is referenced to AHRU internal ground. A jumper between a ground contact on J6 (e.

-6200. which can switch resistive loads with currents up to 110 mA.2 Test enabled Test disabled The system accepts the reference for this input. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1019 July 2011 . -7001 and -7100 Only applicable for LCR-100 with P/N 145130-6002. Discrete Output Logic Open Signal Ground Signal A-B open...Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Normal Acceleration Test Enable Only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 1451302xxx and -7xxx) The system provides a Normal Acceleration Test Enable (NATE) discrete input. -5 VDC -2 VDC .. 0 VDC 4. -3000 and -6xxx) Not applicable for LCR-100 with P/N 145130-6002.2. -6200. -7001 and -7100 The outputs are built as relay contacts.. B-C closed A-B closed B-C open Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open = primary power available = no primary power available = System warn / alignment = System valid = Yaw Rate valid = Yaw Rate Warn = Basic Mode = Normal Mode = Heading valid = Heading invalid = Attitude Mode = Navigation Mode = Directional Gyro Mode = Slaved Heading Mode = Attitude valid = Attitude invalid = Heading valid = Heading invalid = Heading valid = Heading invalid = Turn Rate valid = Turn Rate invalid Connector/Pin J1-07 J4-21 (A) J4-42 (B) J4-15 (C) J4-41 (A) J4-61 (B) J4-41 (A) J4-61 (B) J4-19 (A) J4-40 (B) J4-62 (A) J4-20 (B) J4-62 (A) J4-20 (B) J3-03 (A) J3-18 (B) J3-32 (A) J3-19 (B) J3-16 (A) J3-01 (B) J3-02 (A) J3-31 (B) The system provides the discrete outputs defined in the following table. Discrete Output Aux Power Annunciation System Warn Yaw Rate Warn (1) Basic Mode Annunciator (2) Auto Pilot HDG Interlock ATT Mode Annunciator (3) DG Mode Annunciator (4) Attitude Warn (1) Heading Warn 1 (1) Heading Warn 2 (1) Turn Rate Warn (1) Table 1-25 1) 2) 3) 4) Discrete Output Only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx) Only applicable for systems without synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. -15 VDC .

In DG mode the Auto Pilot Heading Interlock contact is opened for at least 2 seconds when the slew left or slew right function is selected or a heading set command is received.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 AUX Power Annunciation The AUX power indication output (J1. Basic Mode Annunciator Only applicable for systems without synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1020 July 2011 . Yaw Rate Warn Only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 1451302xxx and -7xxx) The rates warn output indicates whether the BIT detects any failure that could affect the output of the yaw rate with the logic defined in Table 1-25. The Auto Pilot Heading Interlock contact is opened when the system operates in MSU calibration mode. System Warn The system warn output indicates the status of the alignment and the health state of the system during operation with the logic defined in Table 1-25. -7001 and -7100 The ATT Mode Annunciator output indicates when the system operates in attitude mode with the logic defined in Table 1-25. ATT Mode Annunciator Not applicable for LCR-100 with P/N 145130-6002. The Auto Pilot Heading Interlock contact is opened for 2 seconds when the heading output is altered more than 1 degree at transition from DG Mode to MAG Mode or by selecting the slew left or slew right function during MAG mode. -6200. Pin 07) indicates whether primary power is available at the system with the logic defined in Table 1-25. Auto Pilot Heading Interlock The Auto Pilot Heading Interlock contact is open when the heading is invalid. -3000 and -6xxx) The Basic Mode Annunciator output indicates when the system operates in basic attitude mode with the logic defined in Table 1-25.

e. -7001 and -7100 The DG Mode Annunciator output indicates when the system operates in directional gyro mode with the logic defined in Table 1-25. Synchro Interface Module Discrete Output (Attitude. Heading and Turn Rate warn) The validity determination of the discretes located on the Synchro Interface Module defined in Table 1-25 includes the wrap around test of the corresponding synchro interface output. System Warn DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1021 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 DG Mode Annunciator Only applicable for LCR-100 with P/N 145130-6002. -6200. Example SYSTEM WARN AHRU <110 mA AIRCRAFT +28 VDC +28 VDC AHRU <110 mA AIRCRAFT +28 VDC SYSTEM WARN LIT00005 Figure 1-3 Examples of a typical Wiring of a Discrete Output.g.

1 4. ARINC 429 Input Data Bus No. Bit 31 BNR 0 0 1 1 BCD 0 0 1 1 DIS 0 0 1 1 Bit 30 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Designation Failure Warning No computed data Functional Test Normal Operation Normal Operation (positive) No computed data Functional Test Normal Operation (negative) Normal Operation No computed data Functional Test Failure Warning Table 1-27 SSM Designation for ARINC 429 Input Labels Note: The setting of the SDI of the input Labels except for Label 043 and 275 is handled as don't care (applicable from MOD 20 upwards) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1022 July 2011 . 6 Speed High/Low High/Low High/Low Data Source DADS GNSS CDU/FMS Table 1-26 ARINC 429 Inputs If not stated otherwise for particular Labels. 4 5. 2 3.3 4.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4. 1.3. ARINC 429-P2-16.3. ARINC 429-P3-18.1 Digital Interfaces Digital Input ARINC 429 Input The system provides the input defined in the following table according to ARINC 429 specifications ARINC 429-P1-17.1. the system evaluates the Sign Status Matrix (SSM) of the received ARINC Labels as defined in the following table.

93 511.2 DADS Input On the DADS input (Data Bus No. Bits 17 15 14 N/A Max. For variants without the DADS Select discretes the automatic selection is active all the time.97 N/A Approx.2.3). In the automatic selection mode the DADS input 2 is only used during times. Res.Units olution 1.0 0. 1 and 2) the system accepts the following data from Digital Air Data Systems in accordance with ARINC 706-4.3.1. The processing of Label 350 on the DADS input is activated by a programming constant in the IDM. Update Rate [Hz] 8 8 8 1 Signif.1. when input 1 is invalid. If this function is activated. The input channel selection is controlled by the DADS select discretes (refer to section 1.0625 0. Label (octal) 203 210 215 (1) 350 Parameter Format Min.03125 N/A ft kts mb N/A Pos.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4. The system automatically selects the link speed of the DADS ARINC 429 inputs. paragraph 4. Range 131071 2047. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1023 July 2011 . If automatic selection is active the DADS input 1 channel is the preferred input. Sense up forward always positive N/A Pressure Altitude True Airspeed Impact Pressure Maintenance Discrete Word 1 BNR BNR BNR DIS Table 1-28 1) Digital Air Data Input Only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-6001 The system provides the capability to process data of one or two Digital Air Data Systems (DADS). bit 11 and 12 of Label 350 are interpreted as defined in the following table.

Sense (1) N E (2) (2) N E (1) N/A Range 1024 ± 180 ± 180 0.3.3.125 6. Bits 15 20 20 11 11 15 15 18 N/A Resolution 0.000172 0. Label 130 and 273 according ARINC 743A-4 (refer to Table 1-32 and Table 1-34 in section 1.38E-8 8. On DADS input 1 the system accepts the GNSS defined in the following GNSS input table additionally to the DADS data. paragraph 4.000172 ± 4096 ± 4096 16 N/A sign.000172 0.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Bit Status 1 0 Bit No.125 0.031 0.38E-8 0. Label 101 110 111 120 121 166 174 247 273 (3) Parameter HDOP GNSS Latitude GNSS Longitude GNSS Latitude Fine GNSS Longitude Fine N/S Velocity E/W Velocity Horizontal FOM GNSS Sensor Status Format BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR DIS Units N/A degree degree degree degree knots knots nm N/A pos.000172 8. 1-8 9-10 11 12 13-29 30-31 32 Function Label SDI Field TAS Altitude don’t care SSM Odd Parity Invalid Invalid Valid Valid Table 1-29 DADS Status Input Label 350 The following statement and table is only applicable for the LCR-100-System with P/N 145130-1002.1E-5 N/A Update Rate [Hz] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 1-30 1) 2) 3) GNSS Data Input for LCR-100-System with P/N 145130-1002. Fine data words contain truncated portion of the original data word. Always positive.1.) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1024 July 2011 .

0 0. 3 and 4) the system accepts data from Global Navigation Satellite Systems (e.25 0.Note: for GNSS input data according to ARINC 743 refer to Table 1-31. The system provides the capability to process GNSS data from either GNSS input channel 1 or GNSS input channel 2.1.000172 0.031 0. Integrity Limit Vert.125 0.125 6. Integrity Limit (4) Vertical FOM UTC Fine UTC Vertical Velocity N/S Velocity E/W Velocity Horizontal FOM Date GNSS Sensor Status refer to notes (3). Table 1-34 and Table 1-35) Label 133 not required for LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1003 Labels 130 and 273 according to ARINC 743 (only for LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1003) (refer to Table 1-33. Table 1-37. when GNSS input channel 1 is invalid.125 0. GPS) in accordance with ARINC 743A. -2xxx and -3000). The GNSS input channel 2 is only used.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.000172 0. Sense Up (1) (1) N E (2) (2) (1) (1) (1) (2) (1) Up N E (1) (1) N/A Range ± 131072 1024 1024 ± 180 ± 180 0.000172 16 32768 32768 1.9536743 µs 1.0 23:59:59 ± 32768 ± 4096 ± 4096 16 N/A N/A Sign. Bits 20 15 15 20 20 11 11 17 18 20 17 15 15 15 18 6 N/A Resolution 0.1E-5 1 Day N/A Update Rate [Hz] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 refer to notes (3) and (4) Table 1-31 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) GNSS Data Input Always positive Fine data words contain truncated portion of the original data word Label 130 and 273 according ARINC 743A-4 (refer to Table 1-32.38E-8 8. except for P/N 145130-1002! On the GNSS input (Data Bus No. (5) and (6) Format Units BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BCD DIS feet N/A N/A degree degree degree degree nm feet feet s hr:min:s ft/min knots knots nm d:m:y N/A Pos. The system accepts the GNSS data as defined in the following table.3. Label 076 101 102 110 111 120 121 130 133 136 140 150 165 166 174 247 260 273 Parameter GNSS Altitude (MSL) HDOP VDOP GNSS Latitude GNSS Longitude GNSS Latitude Fine GNSS Longitude Fine Horiz.g.0 s 1.38E-8 0. The GNSS input channel 1 is the preferred input. Table 1-38 and Table 1-39. .) For P/N 145130-3000 only: Label 273 according to ARINC 743B as defined in Table 1-36 is also accepted DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1025 July 2011 .3 GNSS Input NOTE This paragraph is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx.000172 8.125 0.031 0.

1-8 9-10 11-28 29 30-31 32 Function Label SDI Field RAIM Detection Bit Sign Bit SSM Odd Parity 0 .22E-4) Description Table 1-32 Label 130 on GNSS Data Input (all LCR-100 except 145130-1003) Label 130 (only applicable for LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1003) Bit No.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 130 (applicable for all LCR-100 except of P/N 145130-1003) Bit No.16 (LSB = 6. 1-8 9-10 11 12-28 29 30-31 32 Function Label SDI Field RAIM Detection Bit Limit (in nm) Sign Bit SSM Odd Parity 0 = no failures 1 = not isolated satellite failure 0-16 (LSB weight 1.10E-5) Bit Status 1 0 Table 1-33 Label 130 on GNSS Data Input (only LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1003) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1026 July 2011 .

GNSS Sensor Operational Mode Self Test Mode Initialization Mode Acquisition Mode Navigation Mode SBAS. NAV GBAS. 1-8 9-10 11 12 13 14 15 16-19 20-23 24-28 29 30-31 32 Function Label SDI MSB of healthy Satellites visible DADS Status DADS Source IRS/FMS Status IRS/FMS Source Number of Healthy Satellites visible (LSB Bit 16) Number of Satellites Tracked (LSB Bit 20) GNSS Sensor Operational Mode MSB of Satellites tracked SSM Parity (odd) > 15 refer to Table 1-35 and Table 1-36 ≤ 15 > 15 Not Present Secondary Not Present Secondary ≤ 15 Present Primary Present Primary 1 0 Table 1-34 Mode# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 GNSS Sensor Status Word (Label 273) (all LCR-100 except 145130-1003) Bit No.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 273 (applicable for all LCR-100 except of P/N 145130-1003) Bit Status Bit No. NAV Alt/Clk Aiding Reserved Aided Fault 28 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 27 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 26 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 25 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 24 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Table 1-35 GNSS Sensor Operational Mode (from Table 1-34) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1027 July 2011 .

1 Fail Control Data Input No. 2 Fail input differential correction Test Number of healthy Satellites visible (0.15) GNSS Sensor Type GNSS Sensor Operational Mode MSB of healthy Satellites visible (16) SSM Parity (odd) 1 0 Channel 2 Fail Fail Fail On Channel 1 Normal Normal Normal Off refer to Table 1-38 refer to Table 1-39 Table 1-37 GNSS Sensor Status Word (Label 273) (only LCR-100 P/N 145130-1003) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1028 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Bit No. NAV GBAS. NAV Approach Alt/Clk Aiding Reserved Aided Fault Table 1-36 GNSS Sensor Operational Mode (from Table 1-34) for P/N 145130-3000 only Label 273 (only applicable for LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1003) Bit Status Bit No.. 28 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 27 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 26 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 25 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 24 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 Mode# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 GNSS Sensor Operational Mode Self Test Mode Initialization Mode Acquisition Mode Navigation Mode SBAS. 1-8 9-10 11 12-15 16 17 18 19 20-23 24-25 26-28 29 30-31 32 Function Label SDI Control data Input from N/A Fail Control Data Input No.

25 0 1 1 0 24 0 0 1 1 Sensor Type GPS GLONASS GPS/GLONASS N/A Table 1-38 Bit No. 28 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 27 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 GNSS Sensor Type (from Table 1-37) 26 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Operational Mode N/A N/A Startup Autonomous N/A N/A N/A Table 1-39 GNSS Sensor Operational Mode (from Table 1-37) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1029 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Bit No.

359 N/A N/A ±180 ±180 Resolution 0. The system accepts Label 043 and 275 only if the SDI setting of the Label matches with the SDI setting of the LCR-100 AHRU.000172 Update Rate [Hz] 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 Digits 6 6 4 6 N/A 20 20 Pos Sense N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Table 1-40 1) 2) 3) 4) ARINC 429 Inputs from CDU/FMS For LCR-100 Systems with P/N 145130-1000. -2000 and -3000) Priority 3: GNSS position Labels 110/111 (GNSS input channels) If a position on a higher priority Label has been detected all lower priority Labels will be overwritten.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.4 Input from CDU/FMS On the CDU/FMS input (Data Bus No. 5 and 6) the system accepts the ARINC 429 Labels as defined in the following table. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1030 July 2011 . Only for LCR-100 Systems with P/N 145130-1000. 042 and 043 are only accepted as valid.1. -2000 and -3000 Labels 041.1 arcmin 0. if they are received two times within 3 seconds with identical content During index error compensation the range for Label 043 is ± 5 deg The priority of the position input is as follows: Priority 1 (highest): FMS position Labels 041/042 Priority 2: FMS position Labels 310/311(only for LCR-100 Systems with P/N 145130-1000.000172 0.90N 180E .180W 0 .1 arcmin 0.1 deg 1 Day N/A 0. Label 041 (3) 042 (3) 043 260 275 (1) 310 (2) 311 (2) (1) (3) (4) Parameter Set Latitude Set Longitude Set Mag Heading Date Command Discrete Set Latitude Set Longitude Format Units BCD BCD BCD BCD DIS BNR BNR deg deg deg d:m:y N/A deg deg Range 90S .3. -2000 and -3000 and beginning from MOD 20 on: SDI recognition.

If the ARINC command is active the discrete command will be ignored. Bit Status Bit No. -2xxx and -3000) 3) The parity of bit 11 to bit 29 has to be set to odd by the parity bit. If the command is still set at the end of the gyrocompassing alignment the system remains in the gyrocompassing mode. 6) Only for P/N 145130-3000: Reaction on rising edge only DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1031 July 2011 . 4) Trigger command: The Mode will be continued independent of the state of the command. 1-8 9-10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30-31 32 Function Label SDI Field ARINC Selftest command input (1) ARINC DG/MAG Mode command input (1) Not used ARINC DADS select command input (1) ARINC Attitude mode command input (1) (2) ARINC Gyrocompass Command input (1) (2) Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Normal DG Mode refer to Table 1-15 and Table 1-44 Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled 1 0 ARINC Stored HDG Align Command input (1) (2) Enabled Selftest Data Enable DG/MAG Mode Select Not used Not used DADS Select 2 DADS Select 1 Attitude Mode Select (2) (4) Gyrocompass Mode Select (2) (5) Stored Heading Alignment (2) Hybrid GNSS augmentation (2) Re-Initialization of Hybrid Kalman-Filter (6) Parity (3) SSM Odd Parity Selected Selected Enabled Disabled Selected Selftest Mag Mode refer to Table 1-42 refer to Table 1-42 Inactive Inactive Disabled Enabled Inactive Table 1-41 Command Discrete (Label 275) 1) This bit enables or disables the acceptance of the corresponding command Bit in the command discrete word. 5) Trigger command: The Mode will be started and continued independent of the state of the command. As long as the Attitude Mode Select command is set the Gyrocompass Mode Select command is disabled. 2) Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 The command discrete Label 275 is interpreted as defined in the following table.

The system expects that the data allocated to a Time Mark are completely available on the input before the next Time Mark pulse is received. -2xxx and -3000) Without Time Mark signal GNSS data will not be used. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1032 July 2011 . The system provides two Time Mark inputs (A and B) in accordance with ARINC 743 (electrically like RS 422).1. Both Time Mark A inputs must not be used in one installation. 4.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Bit No. 1 DADS No. Time Mark A is available on J4 and J6 as defined in Table 1-85 and Table 1-87.5 Time Mark This paragraph is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 1451301xxx. The Time Mark A input is allocated to the GNSS input channel 1 and GNSS data received on DADS input channel 1. 22 0 0 1 1 23 0 1 0 1 DADS Input Automatic DADS No. The Time Mark B input is allocated to the GNSS input channel 2.3. The latched status of the input Label 275 is output on the ARINC output busses. 2 No DADS Table 1-42 ARINC 429 DADS Select Command The status of the last valid command input Label 275 is latched.

If not stated otherwise for particular Labels. Each output is buffered separately.2. 1 No.2.2 4.3.1. ARINC 429-P3-18.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4. ARINC 429-P2-16. 2 No.2 and Table 1-44). System n/a No. The ARINC word parity bit is always rendered odd.3. 3 Bit 10 0 0 1 1 Bit 9 0 1 0 1 Table 1-44 SDI Bit Setting DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1033 July 2011 . the system sets the Sign Status Matrix (SSM) of the transmitted ARINC Labels as defined in the following table.1 Digital Output ARINC 429 Output The system provides 6 high speed ARINC 429 outputs according to ARINC specifications ARINC 429-P1-17. Bit 31 0 BNR 0 1 1 0 BCD 0 1 1 0 DIS 0 1 1 Bit 30 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Designation Failure Warning No computed data Functional Test Normal Operation Normal Operation (positive) No computed data Functional Test Normal Operation (negative) Normal Operation No computed data Functional Test Failure Warning Table 1-43 SSM Designation for ARINC 429 Output Labels The SDI bit setting is defined by the SDI input discretes (refer to chapter 4.

1.00068 0. Label Parameter Format Max.16) 270 271 272 275 300 (1) 301 (6.9) 302 303 304 305 306 (1) 314 (15.24) 320 324 325 326 (2) Body Yaw / Turn Rate Software Version System Discrete Word 4 System Discrete Word 5 Configuration Discrete Word 1 Configuration Discrete Word 2 Impact Pressure System Discrete Word 1 System Discrete Word 2 System Discrete Word 3 Command Discrete Magnetic Sensor Input Body Normal Accel.00048 N/A + 10°/s Version # deg/s N/A Nose right N/A Update Rate [Hz] Signif.00068 0.2.0 N/A N/A 0.1 g N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A + 10° + 15° + 5° + 45° + 10°/s N/A N/A mb N/A N/A N/A N/A deg g s N/A N/A s nT deg deg deg deg deg/s CW from North CW from North Nose Up Right Wing Down Nose up N/A N/A N/A N/A Always Positive N/A N/A N/A N/A CW from North Up 18 N/A ± 128 N/A 0. paragraph 4.1.00048 N/A N/A N/A (*) N/A N/A N/A N/A + 0.00068 0. Resolution Selftest Value Units Positive Sense 040 (16) 046 (19) 151 152 155 156 215 (14.3. Delay [ms] (20) 30 N/A 100/50 (18) 2 2 2 2 2 10 2/10 (18) 2/10 (18) 2 2 20 8 (4) 40/22 (22) 100/50 (17) 2 2 2/10 (18) 2 20 110 110 20 20 8 (4) 45/22 (22) 20 50/25 (17) 100/50 (17) 100/50 (17) 100/50 (17) N/A N/A 14 N/A N/A N/A N/A 18 18 19 N/A N/A 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 N/A N/A 512 N/A N/A N/A N/A ± 180 ±8 524287 N/A N/A 4096 131072 ± 180 ± 180 ± 180 ± 180 ± 128 N/A N/A .00068 0. System Time Input Discrete Word 1 Input Discrete Word 2 Alignment Countdown MSU Fieldstrength True Heading Mag Heading Pitch Angle Roll Angle Body Pitch Rate BNR BCD DIS DIS DIS DIS BNR DIS DIS DIS DIS BNR BNR BNR DIS DIS BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1034 July 2011 .2.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.5 0.4.03125 N/A N/A N/A N/A 0.00003 1. Range Approx.015 0.1 (4) N/A Max.00068 0. Bits Max.3. Signal Bandwidth [Hz] 8/1. For notes ( ) of the following table refer to section 1.8.1 AHRS Data The system provides the following AHRS data according to ARINC 705-5.

1 g .00068 0.27) 350 351 352 353 354 (1) 356 361 (9) 364 (3. Signal Bandwidth [Hz] 8 (4) 8/1.8 N/A ±131072 ±4 ± 32768 ±4 ±4 N/A 0.9E-6 N/A 0. Body Normal Accel.000015 0.5° + 10°/s + 10°/s + 10°/s N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 10.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label Parameter Format Max. Cross Hdg.9.000 ft + 0.1 g deg/s deg/s g g g Right Wing Down Nose Right Forward Right Up Update Rate [Hz] Signif. Resolution Selftest Value Units Positive Sense 327 (2) 330 (2.5.1 (4) 45 45 45/22 (22) 50 50 100 / 50 (17) 2/10 (18) 2/10 (18) 2/10 (18) 2/10 (18) 10 2 65 8 (4) 60 30 8 (4) 8 (4) N/A 40 40 N/A 25 50 25/50 (23) 50 50 2 18 18 18 18 18 ± 128 ± 128 ±4 ±4 ±4 0. Rate Turn / Body Yaw Rate Maintenance Discrete Word 1 Maintenance Discrete Word 2 Maintenance Discrete Word 3 Maintenance Discrete Word 4 MSU Cal. Accel.000015 + 10°/s + 10°/s + 0.00048 0.02 g + 0.00048 N/A N/A N/A N/A 6.5. Error System Input Status Word Inertial Altitude Vertical Accel.00048 0.000015 0.5 0. Accel.00048 0. Accel.9. Delay [ms] (20) 45/22 (22) 45/22 (22) 45/22 (22) 45/22 (22) 45/22 (22) 100/50 (17) 100/50 (17) 100 /50 (17) 100/50 (17) 100/50 (17) 20 8 (4) 8 (4) 8 / 1.02 g N/A deg deg/s deg/s deg/s N/A N/A N/A N/A deg N/A feet g ft/min g g N/A CW from North Nose Up Right Wing Down Nose Right N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Up Up Up Forward Right N/A Table 1-45 Note: (*) ARINC 429 AHRS Data Output N/A except for bit 13: selftest value: Basic Mode bit 16: selftest value of Autopilot Heading Interlock discrete DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1035 July 2011 . Inert.600 ft/min + 0.00048 0. 21) 377 Body Roll Rate Body Yaw / Turn Rate Body Long. 21) 334 (1) 336 (2) 337 (2) 340 (2. Rate Roll Att.125 0.21) 332 (3.1 g + 0. 7.1 (4) 8 (4) 8 (4) 8 (4) Max.9. Range Approx.27) 331 (3. 21) 376 (9. Equipment Identification BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR DIS DIS DIS DIS BNR DIS BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BCD 18 18 18 18 N/A N/A N/A N/A 18 N/A 18 18 18 18 18 N/A ± 180 ± 128 ± 128 ± 128 N/A N/A N/A N/A ± 1.02 g + 0.000015 0. Speed Along Hdg.21) 365 (9) 375 (9.6. Vert. Bits Max.21) 333 (3.000015 0.000015 N/A + 22. Accel. Body Lat. Magnetic Sensor Input Pitch Att.9.

1. Along Tk horiz. For notes ( ) of the following table refer to section 1. Signal Bandwidth [Hz] Max.12) 335 (11) 360 (12. Bits Max.000015 0.00068 0.5° 0.125 0.2.015 + 10 N22. Accel Cross Tk horiz.00097 0.2. Delay [ms] (20) Update Rate [Hz] 5 2 2 2 2 0.015 0.125 0.28) 362 (11) 363 (11) 366 367 372 (10) 373 374 Magnetic Variation Present Pos Lat Present Pos Long Ground Speed Track Angle True Wind Speed Wind Direction True Track Angle Mag Drift Angle Flight Path Angle Flight Path Accel Track Angle Rate Potential Vert Spd.00068 0.3.015 0.02 g + 200 kts + 200 kts + 30° + 200 kts + 200 kts deg deg deg knots deg knots deg deg deg deg g deg/s ft/min g g knots knots deg knots knots CW from North North from zero East from Zero Always Positive CW from North Always Positive CW from North CW from North Right Up Forward CW Up Forward Right North East CW from North North East Table 1-46 ARINC 429 IRS Data Output DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1036 July 2011 . except P/N 145130-1001 and 145130-1002.2 IRS Data The IRS data output is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx.1.000015 0. Mag E-W Vel.4.00068 0.000172 0.015 0.50° 200 kts 0.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.00068 0. Label Parameter Format Max.125 2 2 160 160 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 60 40 65 60 60 110 110 110 110 110 5 5 10 20 10 10 20 20 20 50 50 50 50 50 10 10 10 10 10 Signif.00068 0.0° 100 kts 30° 5° .125 2 2 2 8 (4) 4 (4) 8 8 8 2 2 0. The system provides the IRS data defined in the following table.02 g 4°/s .000172 0.000015 0. -2xxx and -3000). Mag BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR 18 20 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 ± 180 ± 180 ± 180 ± 4096 ± 180 256 ± 180 ± 180 ± 180 ± 180 ±4 ± 32 ± 32768 ±4 ±4 ± 4096 ± 4096 ± 180 ± 4096 ± 4096 0.00068 0.02 g 0. paragraph 4.3.00068 0.10° . Accel N-S Velocity True E-W Velocity True Wind Direction Magnetic N-S Vel.50° E22.00012 0. Range Resolution Selftest Value Units Positive Sense 147 310 311 312 313 (11) 315 316 (10) 317 (11) 321 (11) 322 (12) 323 (3.015 0.600 ft/min 0.

072 ±4 ± 180 0.00068 0.600 ft/min N/A + 5° 5° 4°/s .2.3 Hybrid Data The hybrid data output is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx.00068 0.00068 + 15° 100 kts 30° + 30° + 10° . 21) 175 (21) 254 (21) 255 (21) 256 (13.125 0.50 E 22.00068 0. Range Resolution Selftest Value Units Positive Sense 55 (26) 104 105 (10) 106 (10) 132 134 (12. Label Parameter Format Max.00068 0.3.10° + 200 kts N 22. Hybrid True Heading Hybrid Potential Vert.5° deg knots deg deg deg ft/min ft deg deg deg/s deg knots deg deg deg deg ft g deg CW from North Always Positive CW from North CW from North CW from North Up Always Positive CW from North CW from North CW Right Always Positive North East Up Forward Up DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1037 July 2011 .000172 0.56E-10 6. For notes ( ) of the following table refer to section 1.00068 0. 12. Bits Max. -2xxx and -3000) except P/N 145130-1001 and 145130-1002 (hybrid data for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002: refer to Table 1-48).4. 21) 160 (11. Delay [ms] Update Rate [Hz] 50 10 10 10 50 50 2 50 20 50 20 20 10 10 10 10 25 50 25 Signif.3.125 0.125 0.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4. Signal Bandwidth [Hz] Max.000172 ± 131.2. Spd.50 0 0 10.000015 0.00097 0.000172 0.00012 0. Hybrid Vertical FOM Hybrid Track Angle True Hybrid Track Angle Mag Hybrid Track Angle Rate Hybrid Drift Angle Hybrid Ground Speed Hybrid Latitude Hybrid Longitude Hybrid Latitude Fine Hybrid Longitude Fine Hybrid Altitude (MSL) Hybrid Flight Path Accel Hybrid Flight Path Angle BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR ---2 8 N/A 2 2 4 (4) 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 8 (4) 2 110 110 110 110 110 65 110 110 110 40 110 110 160 160 160 160 65 60 110 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 20 20 18 18 20 18 18 ± 180 256 ± 180 ± 180 ± 180 ± 32768 32768 ± 180 ± 180 ± 32 ± 180 ± 4096 ± 180 ± 180 0.015 0. 21) 154 (11.000 ft 0.56E-10 0. 21) 153 (11. 21) 135 137 (11. 21) 257 (13.1.000172 6.21) 263 (12. The system provides the hybrid data defined in the following table. 21) Hybrid Mag Heading Hybrid Wind Speed Hybrid Wind Direction True Hybrid Wind Direction Mag.1. paragraph 4. 21) 261 (21) 262 (3.02 g .00068 0.00068 0.

50 0 0 .3. Signal Bandwidth [Hz] N/A N/A 2 2 N/A N/A 8 N/A Max. 21) 257 (13.50 E 22.56E-10 0.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label Parameter Format Max.000172 ± 180 0. paragraph 4.000172 0. Delay [ms] Update Rate [Hz] 2 2 10/50 (23) 10/50 (23) 2 25 25/50 (23) 25 Signif. For notes ( ) of the following table refer to section 1.015 0. Signal Bandwidth [Hz] 2 N/A 2 Max.125 0.1E-5 6.015 0. Bits Max.015 0.000172 0. Range Resolution Selftest Value Units Positive Sense 264 (25) 265 (26) 266 (21) 267 (21) 274 344 345 (21) 346 Hybrid Horizontal FOM Hybrid Predicted Horizontal FOM Hybrid N-S Velocity True Hybrid E-W Velocity True Hybrid Status Word Hybrid Along HDG Velocity Hybrid Vertical Velocity Hybrid Across HDG Velocity BNR BNR BNR BNR DIS BNR BNR BNR 110 110 110 110 N/A 110 65 110 18 18 18 18 N/A 18 18 18 16 16 ± 4096 ± 4096 N/A ± 4096 ± 32768 ± 4096 6.4.00068 0.56E-10 6. Delay [ms] Update Rate [Hz] 50 2 50 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 110 160 160 160 160 110 20 10 10 10 10 25 Signif.000172 6. Label Parameter Format Max.125 0. Range Resolution Selftest Value Units Positive Sense 132 135 137 (11. 21) Hybrid True Heading Hybrid Vertical FOM Hybrid Track Angle True Magnetic Variation Hybrid Ground Speed Hybrid Latitude Hybrid Longitude Hybrid Latitude Fine Hybrid Longitude Fine Hybrid Flight Path Angle BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR 110 110 110 18 18 18 18 18 20 20 18 18 18 ± 180 32768 ± 180 ± 180 ± 4096 ± 180 ± 180 0. 21) 263 (12.1E-5 0.1.5° deg ft deg deg knots deg deg deg deg deg CW from North Always Positive CW from North CW from North Always Positive North East Up DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1038 July 2011 .2.015 N/A 0.00068 + 10° N/A + 5° + 10 + 200 kts N 22.600 ft/min + 40 kts nm nm knots knots N/A knots ft/min knots Always Positive Always Positive North East N/A Forward Up Right Table 1-47 ARINC 429 Hybrid Data Output (24) The LCR-100 system with P/N 145130-1002 provides the hybrid data defined in Table 1-48.00068 0. 21) 147 175 (21) 254 (21) 255 (21) 256 (13.015 N/A N/A + 200 kts + 200 kts N/A + 40 kts . Bits Max.00068 0.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label Parameter Format Max. Signal Bandwidth [Hz] N/A 2 2 N/A 2 Max.00068 0. 21) 340 341 366 (21) 367 (21) 372 (10) 373 (21) 374 (21) Hybrid Horizontal FOM Hybrid N-S Velocity True Hybrid E-W Velocity True Hybrid Status Hybrid Ground Speed Wind Speed Hybrid Wind Direction True Hybrid Track Angle Mag Hybrid Drift Angle Hybrid Flight Path Accel Hybrid Track Angle Rate Hybrid Along HDG Velocity Hybrid Across HDG Velocity Hybrid N-S Velocity Mag Hybrid E-W Velocity Mag Hybrid Wind Direction Mag Hybrid N-S Velocity Mag Hybrid E-W Velocity Mag BNR BNR BNR DIS BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR 110 110 110 N/A 110 110 110 18 18 18 N/A 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 16 ± 4096 ± 4096 N/A ± 4096 256 ± 180 ± 180 ± 180 ±4 ± 32 ± 4096 ± 4096 ± 4096 ± 4096 ± 180 ± 4096 ± 4096 6.000015 0. Range Resolution Selftest Value Units Positive Sense 264 266 (21) 267 (21) 274 312 (21) 315 316 (10) 317 (11.015 0.015 0.015 N/A + 200 kts + 200 kts N/A + 200 kts 100 kts 30° 5° .00068 0. 12. Delay [ms] Update Rate [Hz] 2 25 25 10 20 10 10 20 20 50 50 25 25 20 20 10 10 10 Signif. 21) 323 (3. 21) 335 (11.015 0.00068 0.015 0.00012 0.015 0.1E-5 0. Bits Max.02 g 4°/s + 40 kts + 40 kts + 200 kts + 200 kts + 30° + 200 kts + 200 kts nm knots knots N/A knots knots deg deg deg g deg/s knots knots knots knots deg knots knots Always Positive North East N/A Always Positive Always Positive CW from North CW from North Right Forward CW Forward Right North East CW from North North East 2 2 8 (4) 4 (4) N/A N/A 2 2 -2 2 110 110 60 40 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 Table 1-48 ARINC 429 Hybrid Data Output for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002 DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1039 July 2011 .015 0.10° 0.015 N/A 0.015 0.00068 0. 21) 321 (11.00097 0.

When aircraft is resting on the ground. (18) 10Hz update rate for LCR-100 System with P/N-145130-1002 only. Independent of the attitude of the system 1. (14) Data is directly passed from DADS input to output without any alteration. if Labels 120/121 are not available from GNSS receiver.0) g = -0.5 g. Turn Rate is calculated from yaw rate and roll angle according to the following formula: Turn rate = yaw rate / cos(roll angle) For roll angles exceeding 60°. After a Short Power Interrupt Label is NCD for 1.3. a 60° tilt results in (1.2.0 – 1.0) g = 0. paragraph 4.2. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1040 July 2011 . (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Set to zero for wind speed below 5 knots. For Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. -2xxx and -3000) (16) Only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-6001 (17) Output rate depending on the setting of the program pin ARINC Update Rate Select (refer to section 1. (13) The SSM of these Labels is set NCD. The Normal Acceleration at Label 301 is identical to Label 333 except the output is limited to ± 8 g. Accelerations.0 g.0 * cos60° .e. All tolerances are ± 10 % unless otherwise noticed. Table 1-47 and Table 1-48. (15) Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. the leveled system outputs (1. The Rates (except turn rate).0 second when power returns. The output is limited to the maximum range.1. Inertial Altitude and Inertial Vertical Speed outputs are filtered with a 2nd order low pass filter. output is zero.0 g is subtracted from the measured acceleration.5 – 1.4 Notes to ARINC output tables: These notes belong to the tables: Table 1-45. (1) Label 300 and 334 are the filtered and compensated magnetic sensor unit heading. (11) The SSM of track angle is set to NCD for ground speed below 2 knots. Table 1-46.1.2). The output is limited to the maximum range. The turn rate is filtered by a 1st order low pass filter. (12) The SSM is set to NCD for ground speed below 5 knots. I.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.0) g = (0. -2xxx and -3000) MSU related data is output only when a MSU is available. The system is capable of operating with an acceleration rate of up to 10 g. The system is capable of operating with angular rates of up to 600 deg/s.1. the roll angle is limited to 60°.

1500. Output with LCR-100 Systems P/N 1451301xxx. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1041 July 2011 . 1: WMM 2010). e. (applicable from MOD 20 upwards) (22) 22 ms maximum delay (Only applicable to P/N 145130-1004) (23) 50 Hz update rate (Only applicable to P/N 145130-1004) (24) Not computed during Attitude mode and SSM set to NCD (25) This value represents the 95% value of the hybrid navigation accuracy (26) Output (Only applicable to P/N 145130-3000) (27) Label 330 Body Yaw Rate.g. (20) Maximum delay is defined as the group delay including: Delay of the FOG-IMU for providing data to the system + Filter in System + Computational delay + Transmission delay (21) These output values are transferred to the A/C Center of Gravity if the lever arms from the LCR-100 to the CoG are stored in the IDM. -2xxx and -3000 only. Label 340 Turn Rate (Only applicable to P/N 1451303000) (28) Not available for LCR-100 systems with P/N 145130-3000.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 (19) The last digit of the Software Version number show the actual MagVar Model (0: WMM 2005.

1-8 9 .29 30 . 30 .1.29 Function Label SDI Configuration Word 1 (NG LITEF use only) 30 .10 11 . 1-8 9 . 22 23 .3.31 32 SSM Parity (odd) Table 1-51 Label 156 Configuration Discrete Word 1 (Label 155) The configuration discrete word 2 in ARINC Label 156 has the following bit assignment: Bit No.10 11 .10 11 . 1-8 9 .13 14 . 30 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.31 32 Function SSM Parity (odd) Table 1-49 Label 152 System Discrete Word 4 (Label 151) The system discrete word 5 in ARINC Label 152 has the following bit assignment: Bit No.2.21 Function Label SDI Not used (always 0) Installation Identifier (for GNSS Lever arm identification) Bit No.31 32 Function Use Label 350 on DADS input channels Not used (always 0) SSM Parity (odd) Table 1-52 Configuration Discrete Word 2 (Label 156) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1042 July 2011 .5 Discrete Words Label 151 The system discrete word 4 in ARINC Label 151 has the following bit assignment: Bit No.29 Function Label SDI Test and Maintenance (NG LITEF use only) Bit No. 1-8 9 .29 Function Label SDI Configuration Word 4 (NG LITEF use only) Bit No.10 11 .31 32 Function SSM Parity (Odd) Table 1-50 Label 155 System Discrete Word 5 (Label 152) The configuration discrete word 1 in ARINC Label 155 has the following bit assignment: Bit No.

if the unit is operating in attitude mode bits are set according to the definition in Table 1-53 DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1043 July 2011 . -2xxx and -3000). For this special system refer to Table 155. bit 14 is set according to DG mode command. 1) Only for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. 2) For Standard-AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-6xxx and -7xxx) the Bit Status is always 1 3) For AHRS systems with P/N 145130-1xxx and -2xxxx: not Applicable in IRS operation (always 0) 4) For AHRS systems with P/N 145130-3000: If the unit is operating in navigation mode (IRS operation) bit 13 is set to 1. 1-8 9-10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26-28 29 30-31 32 Function Label SDI Field Align Mode / Ready Attitude / Navigation Mode (2) Normal / Basic Mode (3) (4) Slaved Mode / DG Mode (3) (4) Attitude Invalid Autopilot Heading Interlock Realignment Mode (1) TAS fail AHRU Fault Synchro True/Mag HDG (1) Align fail No Position initialization (1) Excessive Motion Error (1) Stored Heading Alignment Enabled (1) Extreme Latitude (1) Align Status (1) Gyrocompass Plausibility Test (1) SSM Odd Parity 1 0 Aligning Attitude Normal Slaved Yes Invalid Yes Yes Yes True Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Wait/Failed Ready Navigation Basic DG No Valid No No No Mag No No No No No refer to Table 1-54 Passed Table 1-53 System Discrete Word 1 (Label 270). For Standard-AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-6xxx and -7xxx) the Bit Status is always 0. N/A for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1001. Bit Status Bit No. Table 153 is not applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1001.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 270 The system discrete word 1 in ARINC Label 270 has the following bit assignment.

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 .31 32 Function Label SDI Field Align Mode/ Ready Slaved Mode / DG Mode Normal / Basic Mode (1) Attitude / Navigation Mode Attitude Invalid Autopilot Heading Interlock Realignment Mode TAS fail AHRU Fault Synchro True/Mag HDG Align fail No Position initialization Excessive Motion Error Stored Heading Alignment Enabled Extreme Latitude Align Status Gyrocompass Plausibility Test SSM Odd Parity Bit Status 1 0 Aligning DG Normal Attitude Yes Invalid Yes Yes Yes True Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Wait/Failed Ready Slaved Basic Navigation No Valid No No No Mag No No No No No refer to Table 1-54 Passed Table 1-55 System Discrete Word 1 (Label 270). 1) Not Applicable in IRS operation (always 0) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1044 July 2011 . 1-8 9 . Bit No.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Bit No. Only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1001. For all other Systems refer to Table 153. 28 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 27 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 26 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Alignment Status time > 600 s 480 s < time  600 s 240 s < time  480 s 120 s < time  240 s 60 s < time  120 s 30 s < time  60 s 0 < time  30 s Alignment finished / Ready to Nav Table 1-54 Label 270 Alignment Status Bit Assignment The system discrete word 1 in ARINC Label 270 has the following bit assignment. Table 155 is only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1001.28 29 30 .

These bits are not intended to be used in digital system versions. Bit Status Bit No. -3000 and -6xxx: Basic Mode Discrete LCR-100 Systems with P/N 145130-2xxx and 145130-7xxx: Yaw Rate Warn Discrete 2) LCR-100 Systems with P/N 145130-1xxx and -3000: Always 0 in IRS operation. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1045 July 2011 . -7001 and -7100) 1) LCR-100 Systems with P/N 145130-1xxx. 14. 3) Bit is not set (0) in case of MSU unavailable and DG Mode active Bit 20 0 0 0 0 1 1 19 0 0 1 1 0 0 18 0 1 0 1 0 1 Status Startup Static Alignment Moving Alignment Normal Operation MSU Calibration Test Mode Table 1-57 Main Mode Bit Assignment (from Table 1-56) Note: Bits 12.31 32 Function Label SDI Not used.29 30 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 271 The system discrete word 2 in ARINC Label 271 has the following bit assignment. -6200.10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 . -7001 and 7100. -6200. 1-8 9 .Available stalled Low Normal Table 1-56 System Discrete Word 2 (Label 271)(all LCR-100 versions. 15. always 0 Normal Acceleration Warn Fan Monitor Heading Warn Discrete Attitude Warn Discrete Yaw Rate Warn / Basic Mode (1) (2) System Warn Discrete Main Mode Turn Rate Warn Discrete MSU Unavailable (3) Magnetic Field Strength Status Not used. always 0 SSM Parity (odd) 1 0 Warn Normal Fail Normal / No Fan Warn Normal Warn Normal Warn/Basic Normal Warn Normal refer to Table 1-57 Warn Normal Unavailable / Not in. except 145130-6002.20 21 22 23 24 . 16 and 21 reflect the status of the analog output discretes of the synchro interface module. except of P/N 145130-6002. Table 156 is applicable for all LCR-100 systems.

-6200. 16 and 21 reflect the status of the analog output discretes of the synchro interface module. always 0 SSM Parity (odd) 1 0 Warn Fail Warn Warn Warn Warn DG Mode Warn Unavailable / Not installed Low Normal Normal / No Fan Normal Normal Normal Normal Slaved Mode Normal Available Normal refer to Table 1-59 Table 1-58 System Discrete Word 2 (Label 271)(only for LCR-100 versions with P/N 145130-6002.25 26 . 14. -7001 and -7100. -7001 and -7100) 1) Bit is not set (0) in case of MSU unavailable and DG Mode active Main Mode Bit 28 0 0 0 0 1 1 27 0 0 1 1 0 0 26 0 1 0 1 0 1 Status Startup Static Alignment Moving Alignment Normal Operation MSU Calibration Test Mode Table 1-59 Main Mode Bit Assignment (from Table 1-58) Note: Bits 12. always 0 Turn Rate Warn Discrete MSU Unavailable (1) Magnetic Field Strength Status Not used. Table 158 is only applicable for LCR-100 systems with P/N 145130-6002. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1046 July 2011 . always 0 Main Mode Not used.10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 .28 29 30 . 1-8 9 . Bit Status Bit No. -6200.31 32 Function Label SDI Not used. 15. always 0 Normal Acceleration Warn Fan Monitor Heading Warn Discrete Attitude Warn Discrete Yaw Rate Warn System Warn Discrete DG Mode Discrete Not used.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 271 The system discrete word 2 in ARINC Label 271 has the following bit assignment.20 21 22 23 24 .

28 29 30 . Navigation or Altitude Aiding Mode of GNSS.18 19 20 . Table 1-60 is not applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002. 18 16 0 0 1 1 17 15 0 1 0 1 Hybrid Status Word (Label 274) Primary GPSSU Validity Secondary GPSSU Validity Valid Inactive Functional Test Fail Comment Initialization. Acquisition.25 Function Label SDI Time Mark 1 Availability Status Time Mark 2 Availability Status Hybrid Performance Status RAIM Availability Status Secondary GPSSU Validity Primary GPSSU Validity GPSSU Source Number of Satellites Tracked (LSB Bit 20) Not used. GBAS. Reserved Table 1-61 GPSSU Validity DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1047 July 2011 .16 17 . Aiding. always 0 (Applicable to all LCR-100 versions except P/N 145130-3000 (see below) ) IDM parameters Availability Status (GNSS 1) (Applicable to 145130-3000 only) IDM parameters Availability Status (GNSS 2) (Applicable to 145130-3000 only) Hybrid Operational Mode MSB of Satellite tracked (16) SSM Parity (odd) not available not available degraded not available available available normal available refer to Table 1-61 refer to Table 1-61 Secondary Primary 24 25 26 .10 11 12 13 14 15 . For this special system refer to Table 1-63. SBAS No Bus Activity Self Test Mode Fault Mode. 1-8 9 .31 32 not available not available available available refer to Table 1-62 Table 1-60 Bit No.23 24 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 274 The hybrid status word in ARINC Label 274 has the following bit assignment. Bit Status 1 0 Bit No.

1-8 9 . always 0 RAIM Availability Status Time Mark 2 Availability Status Time Mark 1 Availability Status Hybrid Performance Status Hybrid Operational Mode Secondary GPSSU Validity Primary GPSSU Validity GPSSU Source Number of Satellites Tracked (LSB Bit 25) MSB of Satellite tracked (16) SSM Parity (odd) Primary available available available normal not available not available not available degraded refer to Table 1-65 refer to Table 1-64 refer to Table 1-64 Secondary Bit Status 1 0 Table 1-63 Hybrid Status Word (Label 274) Only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002.19 20 .28 29 30 .31 32 Function Label SDI Not used. Table 1-63 is only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002. Bit No.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Bit No.10 11-12 13 14 15 16 17 . For all other Systems refer to Table 1-60.21 22 . 28 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 27 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 26 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Hybrid Operational Mode GNSS communication missing Initialization Mode Stationary Alignment Moving Alignment Full Hybrid Navigation Free Inertial Navigation Horizontal Augmented Navigation Vertical Augmented Navigation Table 1-62 Label 274 Hybrid Operational Modes The hybrid status word in ARINC Label 274 has the following bit assignment. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1048 July 2011 .23 24 25 .

23 21 0 0 1 1 22 20 0 1 0 1 Primary GPSSU Validity Secondary GPSSU Validity Fail Functional Test Inactive Valid Fault Mode. 19 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 18 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 17 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Table 1-65 Hybrid Operational Modes Only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002. Aided. Reserved Self Test Mode No Bus Activity Initialization.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Bit No. Navigation or Altitude Aiding Mode of GNSS. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1049 July 2011 . SBAS Comment Table 1-64 GPSSU Validity Only applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002. Acquisition. Hybrid Operational Mode GNSS communication missing Initialization Mode Stationary Alignment GNSS Moving Alignment Free Inertial Navigation not used not used Hybrid Navigation Bit No. GBAS.

always 0 Mounting Position No. 1-8 9 . 2 SDI 1 SDI 2 Parity DG Mode Logic Select Yaw/Rate SF Select 1 (1) / DADS Select 1 (2) Yaw/Rate SF Select 2 (1) / DADS Select 2 (2) ARINC Turn Rate Select Ground/Air Logic Select MSU Excitation Voltage Select ARINC Update Rate Select Not used. always 0 SSM Parity (odd) Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Bit Status 1 0 Table 1-66 1) 2) Input Discrete Word 1 (Label 303) Only applicable for systems with installed Synchro Interface Module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx) Only applicable for systems without Synchro Interface Module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx.10 11 .13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 .29 30 .31 32 Function Label SDI Not used. -3000 and -6xxx) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1050 July 2011 . 1 Mounting Position No.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 303 The input discrete word 1 in ARINC Label 303 indicates the following status of program pins: Bit No.

13 14 15 16 17 . always 0 SSM Parity (odd) Bit Status 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled On Ground Enabled Selected Enabled Enabled Enabled - Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled In Air Disabled Not selected Disabled Disabled Disabled - Table 1-67 1) Input Discrete Word 2 (Label 304) Not applicable to LCR-100 P/N 145130-6xxx and -6xxx (always 0) Label 350 Maintenance discrete word 1 in ARINC Label 350: Refer to Table 3-5 in section 3 Label 351 Maintenance discrete word 2 in ARINC Label 351: Refer to Table 3-6 in section 3 Label 352 Maintenance discrete word 3 in ARINC Label 352: Refer to Table 3-7 in section 3 Label 353 Maintenance discrete word 4 in ARINC Label 353: Refer to Table 3-8 in section 3 DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1051 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 304 The input discrete word 2 in ARINC Label 304 indicates the following status of the control discrete input: Bit No.10 11 .31 32 Function Label SDI Not used. always 0 Test Mode Command Interface Select Selftest Data Enable Not used. always 0 DG/MAG Mode Select MSU Calibration Slew Left Slew Right On Ground / In Air Normal Acceleration Test Attitude Mode (1) Gyrocompass Mode Select Stored Heading Alignment Synchro True/Mag HDG Select Not used. 1-8 9 .18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 .

always 0 DADS Input 1 DADS Input 2 GNSS Input 1 GNSS Input 2 FMS / CDU Input 1 FMS / CDU Input 2 IDM Status Fan Status Time Mark A Time Mark B Not used. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. paragraph 4. Norm. Discrete Word 2 System Discrete Word 1 System Discrete Word 2 System Discrete Word 3 BNR BCD DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS NCD/Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm.6 DITS Status Indication The system sets the DITS SSM values of the AHRS data depending on the operation mode: Label Parameter Format Alignment Mode Attitude Mode (AHRS operation) Navigation Mode Realignment Mode MSU Calibration Mode Norm. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1052 July 2011 .1. Norm. Norm.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 356 The system input status word in ARINC Label 356 has the following bit assignment: Bit No. Norm. 040 046 151 152 155 156 270 271 272 Body Turn Rate Software Version System Discrete Word 4 System Discrete Word 5 Config. Norm. Norm. Norm. 4. Norm. Norm. Norm. Maintenance Test Mode NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Selftest (P/N -1xxx.1) is detected on the port.3.3. Norm. Norm.1. Norm. If a continuous data stream is provided to the port. Norm. Norm. Norm.2. -2xxx and -3000 only) Norm. Norm. (1) Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. 1-8 9-10 11-13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24-29 30-31 32 Function Label SDI Not used. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. always 0 SSM Parity (odd) Bit Status 1 0 Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Failure Warn Inactive Inactive - Active Active Active Active Active Active Normal Normal Active Active - Table 1-68 System Input Status Word (Label 356) The status of the ARINC 429 input port is set active for 2 seconds if a related input Label (refer to section 1. Norm. Norm. Norm. the indication will remain active. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. TST Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Discrete Word 1 Config.

Norm. Norm. Magnetic Sensor Input Pitch Att. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Word 3 Mainten. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. (2) Navigation Mode Realignment Mode MSU Calibration Mode Norm. Norm. Norm. Error System Input Status Word Inertial Altitude Vertical Accel. NCD/Norm. Norm. Norm. TST Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. if Turn Rate selected set to NORM when attitude alignment is completed. NCD Norm. Norm. Rate Roll Att. Norm. Identification DIS BNR BNR BNR DIS DIS BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR DIS DIS DIS DIS BNR DIS BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BCD Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Vert. Norm. NCD NCD Norm. Norm. If Body Yaw Rate selected always set to NORM. Norm. Norm. Norm.(1) Norm. Norm. Norm. Cross Hdg. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. NCD/Norm. Norm. NCD/Norm NCD/Norm. Norm. Norm. Discr. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Accel. Norm. Norm. NCD/ Norm. Norm. Norm. Discr.(1) NCD/Norm. Norm. NCD Norm. Norm. Norm. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1053 July 2011 . Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Body Normal Accel. Equipm. Norm. Norm. Norm. NCD/ Norm. -2xxx and -3000 only) Norm. Discr. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. TST TST TST TST TST Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Word 2 Mainten. (1) Norm. Rate Turn / Body Yaw Rate Mainten. Norm. Accel. Norm. Norm. Norm. NCD/ Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. NCD/ Norm. Norm. Norm. NCD NCD Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm.(1) Norm. Discr. Inert. Norm. Norm. Body Lat. Norm. Maintenance Test Mode NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Selftest (P/N -1xxx. Norm. Norm. Speed Along Hdg. Norm. Norm. Word 4 MSU Cal. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. 275 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 314 320 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 336 337 340 350 351 352 353 354 356 361 364 365 375 376 377 Command Discrete Magnetic Sensor Input Body Normal Accel.(3) Norm. System Time Input Discrete Word 1 Input Discrete Word 2 Alignment Countdown MSU Fieldstrength True Heading Mag Heading Pitch Angle Roll Angle Body Pitch Rate Body Roll Rate Body Yaw / Turn Rate Body Long. Norm. Norm. Norm. NCD Norm. Word 1 Mainten. NCD/ Norm. NCD/Norm. NCD/Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. NCD if MAG mode is active and MSU is not available (Not connected). Norm. Norm.(3) Norm. Norm. Accel. Norm. Norm. Norm. TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Table 1-69 1) 2) 3) SSM Indication of AHRS Data depending on System Mode Attitude and Attitude Rates are set valid when attitude alignment is completed. Norm. Norm. Norm.(1) Norm. Norm. (1) Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label Parameter Format Alignment Mode Attitude Mode (AHRS operation) Norm. Norm. Accel. Norm. Norm. Norm. NCD/Norm.(1) NCD/Norm. NCD NCD/Norm. NCD NCD Norm. Norm.

Norm. -2xxx and -3000. Mag E-W Vel.(1) NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Norm. Norm. -2xxx and -3000). Norm. Norm.(2) Norm.(2) Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm.(2) TST TST Norm.(2) MSU Calibration Mode NCD NCD NCD NCD Maintenance Test Mode NCD NCD NCD NCD Selftest 055 104/315 105/316 (1) 106/372 (1) Hybrid Mag Heading Hybrid Wind Speed Hybrid Wind Direction True Hybrid Wind Direction Mag BNR BNR BNR BNR Norm.(2) Norm.(2) Norm.(2) NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Navigation Mode Norm. Label Parameter Format Alignment Mode Attitude Mode (AHRS operation) NCD/Norm.(2) Norm. Norm. except P/N 145130-1001). Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. The IRS data output is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. Norm. Attitude Mode (AHRS operation) Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm.(2) Norm. Norm. Norm. Label (1) Parameter Format Alignment Mode NCD NCD Norm. TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST Table 1-70 1) 2) SSM Indication of IRS Data depending on System mode Set to normal operation when valid latitude and longitude is input Set to normal operation if GNSS position is available The system sets the DITS SSM values of the hybrid data depending on the operation mode as defined in the following table.(2) Norm.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 The system sets the DITS SSM values of the IRS data depending on the operation mode as defined in the following table. Norm. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1054 July 2011 .(2) Norm. The hybrid data output is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Realignment Mode MSU Calibration Mode NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Maintenance Test Mode NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Self test 147 310 311 312 313 315 316 317 321 322 323 335 360 362 363 366 367 372 373 374 Magnetic Variation Present Pos Lat Present Pos Long Ground Speed Track Angle True Wind Speed Wind Direct True Track Angle (Mag) Drift Angle Flight Path Angle Flight Path Accel Track Angle Rate Potential Vert Spd Along Tk Hrz Accel Cross Tk Hrz Accel N-S Velocity E-W Velocity Wind Direction Magnetic N-S Vel. Norm. Mag BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR NCD/Norm.(2) Navigation Mode Realignment Mode Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm.(2) Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm. Norm.

(2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm.heading > 5 degree or if the elapsed time without valid GNSS data exceeds 600 sec. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label (1) Parameter Format Alignment Mode NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Norm. (2) Norm.1002) . (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm.position > 66 m or . (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST TST Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) MSU Calibration Mode NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Maintenance Test Mode NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Selftest 132 134 135 137 153/317 (1) 154/335 (1) 160/321 (1) 175/312 (1) 254 255 256 257 261 262/323 (1) 263 264 265 266 267 274 344 345 346 373/366 (1) 374/367 (1) Hybrid True Heading Hybrid Potential Vert Spd Hybrid Vertical FOM Hybrid Track Angle Hybrid Track Angle Mag Hybrid Track Angle Rate Hybrid Drift Angle Hybrid Ground Speed Hybrid Latitude Hybrid Longitude Hybrid Latitude Fine Hybrid Longitude Fine Hybrid Altitude (MSL) Hybrid Flight Path Accel. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm.velocity > 1 m/s. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. Invalid if the following limits of estimated hybrid accuracy are exceeded (Only applicable for LCR-100 Systems with P/N. (2) Navigation Mode Realignment Mode Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. Augmentation Data The following table shows required augmentation data to achieve valid AHRS data output during normal operation: DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1055 July 2011 . (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. or . (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. Hybrid Flight Path Angle Hybrid Horizontal FOM Hybrid Predicted Horizontal FOM Hybrid N-S Velocity True Hybrid E-W Velocity True Hybrid Status Hybrid Along HDG Velocity Hybrid Vertical Velocity Hybrid Across HDG Velocity Hybrid N-S Velocity Mag Hybrid E-W Velocity Mag BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR DIS BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. TST TST TST TST TST Table 1-71 1) 2) SSM Indication of Hybrid and GNSS Data depending on System Mode If a second Label number is mentioned this is applicable to LCR-100 system with P/N 145130-1002 Set to normal if hybrid operational mode is in one of the navigation sub modes as defined in Table 1-62 (applicable for all LCR-100 systems except P/N 145130-1002) and Table 1-65 (only applicable for LCR-100 system with PN 145130-1002). (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Attitude Mode (AHRS operation) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm. (2) Norm.

Body Normal Accel. System Time Input Discrete Word 1 Input Discrete Word 2 Alignment Countdown MSU Fieldstrength True Heading Mag Heading Pitch Angle Roll Angle Body Pitch Rate Body Roll Rate Body Yaw/ Turn Rate Body Long. Body Lat. Cross Hdg. Error System Input Status Inertial Altitude Vertical Accel.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label Parameter Format MSU DADS Pressure Altitude DADS TAS GNSS Horizontal Data (Table 1-75) GNSS Vertical Data (Table 1-76) 040 046 151 152 155 156 270 271 272 275 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 314 320 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 336 337 340 350 351 352 353 354 356 361 364 365 375 376 377 Body Turn Rate Software Version System Discrete Word 4 System Discrete Word 5 Configuration Discrete Word 1 Configuration Discrete Word 2 System Discrete Word 1 System Discrete Word 2 System Discrete Word 3 Command Discrete Magnetic Sensor Input Body Normal Accel. Inert. Rate Turn / Body Yaw Rate Maintenance Discrete Word 1 Maintenance Discrete Word 2 Maintenance Discrete Word 3 Maintenance Discrete Word 4 MSU Cal. Accel. Magnetic Sensor Input Pitch Att. Vert. Speed Along Hdg. Accel. Accel. Equipment Identification BNR BCD DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS BNR BNR BNR DIS DIS BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR DIS DIS DIS DIS BNR DIS BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BCD X X X (1) X X Table 1-72 1) Required Augmentation Data for valid AHRS Data Output When operated in Attitude MAG mode DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1056 July 2011 . Accel. Rate Roll Att.

Mag BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR X X X X X X Table 1-73 Required Augmentation Data for valid IRS Data Output The following table shows required augmentation data to achieve valid hybrid data output during normal operation: Label (1) Parameter Format BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR MSU DADS Pressure Altitude DADS TAS GNSS Hori. Mag E-W Vel. Accel N-S Velocity E-W Velocity Wind Direction Mag N-S Vel.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 The following table shows required augmentation data to achieve valid IRS data output during normal operation: Label Parameter Format MSU DADS Pressure Altitude DADS TAS GNSS Horizontal Data (Table 1-75) GNSS Vertical Data (Table 1-76) 147 310 311 312 313 315 316 317 321 322 323 335 360 362 363 366 367 372 373 374 Magnetic Variation Present Pos Lat Present Pos Long Ground Speed Track Angle True Wind Speed Wind Direct True Track Angle Mag Drift Angle Flight Path Angle Flight Path Accel Track Angle Rate Potential Vert Speed Along Trk Horiz. Accel Cross Trk Horiz.GNSS Verzontal Data tical Data (Table 1-75) (Table 1-76) 055 104/315 (1) 105/316 (1) 106/372 (1) 132 134 135 137 153/317 (1) 154/335 (1) 160/321 (1) 175 Hybrid Mag Heading Hybrid Wind Speed Hybrid Wind Direction True Hybrid Wind Direction Mag Hybrid True Heading Hybrid Potential Vert Speed Hybrid Vertical FOM Hybrid Track Angle Hybrid Track Angle Mag Hybrid Track Angle Rate Hybrid Drift Angle Hybrid Ground Speed X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1057 July 2011 .

The following table shows required horizontal GNSS augmentation data. Hybrid Flight Path Angle Hybrid Horizontal FOM Hybrid Predicted Horizontal FOM Hybrid N-S Velocity True Hybrid E-W Velocity True Hybrid Status Hybrid Along HDG Velocity Hybrid Vertical Velocity Hybrid Across HDG Velocity Hybrid N-S Velocity Mag Hybrid E-W Velocity Mag X X X X X X X X X X X X X X (2) X X X X X Table 1-74 1) 2) Required Augmentation Data for valid Hybrid Data Output If a second Label number is mentioned this is applicable to LCR-100 system with P/N 145130-1002 Only applicable for LCR-100 Systems with P/N 145130-1002 and -1003.GNSS Verzontal Data tical Data (Table 1-75) (Table 1-76) 254 255 256 257 261 262/323 (1) 263 264 265 266 267 274 344 345 346 373 374 Hybrid Latitude Hybrid Longitude Hybrid Latitude Fine Hybrid Longitude Fine Hybrid Altitude (MSL) Hybrid Flight Path Accel. For Systems with P/N 145130-1000.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label (1) Parameter Format BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR DIS BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR MSU DADS Pressure Altitude DADS TAS GNSS Hori. Label 101 110 111 120 121 130 150 166 174 247 260 273 377 Parameter HDOP GNSS Latitude GNSS Longitude GNSS Latitude Fine GNSS Longitude Fine Horizontal Integrity Limit UTC N/S Velocity E/W Velocity Horizontal FOM Date GNSS Sensor Status Equipment ID Note Not required for LCR-100 System P/N 145130-1002 Not required for LCR-100 System P/N 145130-1002 Not required for LCR-100 System P/N 145130-1002 Not required for LCR-100 System P/N 145130-1002 Table 1-75 Horizontal GNSS Augmentation data DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1058 July 2011 . -2000 and -3000 Label 274 is sent independent of the receipt of GNSS data.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 The following table shows required vertical GNSS augmentation data. Label 076 102 130 133 136 150 165 273 377 Parameter GNSS Altitude (MSL) VDOP Horizontal Integrity Limit Vertical Integrity Limit Vertical FOM UTC Vertical Velocity GNSS Sensor Status Equipment ID Table 1-76 Vertical GNSS Augmentation data DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1059 July 2011 .

5 (1) 0.4 4.2 Analog Output During system startup all analogue outputs of the system remain zero.1 4.4. The system has one Attitude Synchro Reference input used as reference for pitch and roll synchro outputs as well as for pitch and roll 2-Wire AC outputs.4. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1060 July 2011 .3 0.4. The system has two Heading Synchro References (HDG1 and HDG2) inputs that are used as reference for the heading 1 respectively heading 2 synchro outputs. The synchro reference input accepts 26 VAC 400 Hz sinusoidal voltage with signal quality according "ED-14D / DO-160E: Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment" section 16 scaled from 115 VAC to 26 VAC.3 0.4.5 (1) 0. All synchro reference inputs are AC coupled to the aircraft.3 0.2.5 (1) 0 deg = Horizon 0 deg = Horizon 0 deg = Magnetic North 0 deg = Magnetic North Nose Up Right Wing Down Nose Right Index Reference Positive Direction Sense Scale Factor [deg] 1=1 1=1 1=1 Load Capability Signal Format Selftest Value [deg] 3 Wire 3 Wire 3 Wire refer to Table 1-80 refer to Table 1-80 refer to Table 1-80 refer to Table 1-80 [deg] Pitch Roll Magnetic Heading 1 Magnetic Heading 2 ± 180 ± 180 0-360 [Ohm] 3 Passive Synchro Receiver 120+j450 3 Passive Synchro Receiver 120+j450 3 Passive Synchro Receiver 120+j450 3 Passive Synchro Receiver 120+j450 0-360 12 Nose Right 1=1 3 Wire Table 1-77 1) Synchro Outputs Reduced accuracy outside the temperature range of -40 °C and + 55 °C.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.5 (1) 0.1 Synchro Output This paragraph is only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 systems with P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx). 4. This is equivalent to the scaling to 230 VAC defined in section 16. 4.1 Analog Interfaces Analog Input Synchro Reference Input This paragraph is only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR100 systems with P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx). The system outputs the synchro signals according ARINC 407-1 standard: Output Signal Range D/A Resolution [Bit] 16 16 12 Analog Conversion Accuracy [deg] 95 % 0.1.3 0.

The shown values have a maximum tolerance of +/-3%.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 NOTE The indicated angle of a synchro output is defined by the ratio between the three synchro voltages independent of the absolute value of these voltages. at nominal reference input voltage of 26VAC). The synchro voltage outputs on the LCR-100 are sensitive to the applied load. Figure 1-4 Synchro Output Voltage as Function of Synchro Load DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1061 July 2011 . The following figure shows a typical measurement of the general characteristic of the synchro output dependent on applied load in reference to the ARINC 407-1 standard (Angle 0°.

3.5 0.4. The output is filtered by software with a 1st order low pass filter with a time constant of 2.1 MAG Heading Slaving Error This output is only applicable if a MSU is installed.Magnetic Sensor Heading Input The accuracy is ± 15 % of the full scale value.3 µA/deg.2.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.2.4.2 2 Wire AC Output This paragraph is only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 systems with P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx). The MAG Heading Slaving Error output indicates the difference between the analytical platform heading and the Magnetic Sensor Heading Input. The sense of the output is: Slaving Error = analytical platform heading .5 0.4. That corresponds to an output range of ± 15°.5 0V= Horizon 0V= Horizon 0V= Horizon 0V= Horizon Nose Up Right Wing Down Nose Up Right Wing Down Index Reference Positive Direction Sense Scale Factor (3) [mV/deg] at 20 deg 50 50 200 167 (2) 200 167 (2) Load Capability [kOhm] > 10 > 10 >5 >5 2 Wire AC (1) 2 Wire AC (1) 2 Wire AC (1) 2 Wire AC (1) Signal Format Selftest Value [deg] Pitch Two Wire Roll Two Wire Pitch Two Wire Roll Two Wire ± 90 ± 90 ± 90 ± 90 [deg] refer to Table 1-80 refer to Table 1-80 refer to Table 1-80 refer to Table 1-80 Table 1-78 1) 2) 3) 2 Wire AC Outputs Positive sense out of phase with reference 167 mV/deg for LCR-100 system with P/N 145130-7100 Voltage values are RMS of the 400Hz AC output signal 4.0 seconds. The system outputs the 2 Wire AC signals as defined in the following table: Output Signal Range D/A Resolution [Bit] 16 16 16 16 Analog Conversion Accuracy [deg] 95 % at 20 deg 0. The scale factor is + 13.2. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1062 July 2011 . The MAG Heading Slaving Error is a 2-wire DC current output. The full scale of the output is ± 200 µA.5 0. The maximum load is 1 kOhm.3 DC Output 4.

Table 1-19).3. 4.2.2.9 seconds. The Yaw Rate DC Output is a 2-wire differential DC output. The Turn Rate DC Output is a 2-wire differential DC output.2. The Normal Acceleration DC Output is referenced to the aircraft body coordinate system and is a 2-wire differential DC output.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.4 Normal Acceleration DC Output This paragraph is only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 systems with P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx). 333 or 666 mV/deg/s by program pin setting (refer to section 1.4.4. The scale factor is 333 mV/deg/s. 200.3 Turn Rate DC Output This paragraph is only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 systems with P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx). That means that if the aircraft is on ground and leveled the output will be + 383 mV corresponding to 1 g. The accuracy is ± 10 % of the full scale value. That corresponds to an output range of ± 10 g. That corresponds to an output range of ± 12 deg/s. ± 20. The scale factor is selectable to 100. The output voltage for CW rate (nose right) is positive. The maximum load is 1 kOhm. The output is filtered by software with a 1st order low pass filter with a time constant of 0. That corresponds to output ranges of ± 40. The accuracy is ± 10 % of the full scale value. The output voltage for CW rate (nose right) is positive.3. 4. The full scale of the output is ± 4 VDC.83 VDC. The output voltage is positive for acceleration in upward direction. ± 12 or ± 6 deg/s depending on program pin setting.2. The accuracy is ± 10 % of the full scale value.1. The maximum load is 1 kOhm. The full scale of the output is ± 3. paragraph 4. The maximum load is 1 kOhm.2 Yaw Rate DC Output This paragraph is only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 systems with P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx).4. The output is filtered by software with an 8 Hz 2nd order low pass filter. The full scale of the output is ± 4 VDC. The scale factor is + 383 mV/g. The output is filtered by software with an 8 Hz 2nd order low pass filter.2. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1063 July 2011 .3.

2.5 VAC (Bendix King). The interconnection with both flux valve types is shown in Table 1-79.2 RS-232 The system provides a RS-232 asynchronous interface without hardware handshake with a minimum baud rate of 9600 Bd for maintenance and test purposes. test and calibration purposes and the other is currently not used. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1064 July 2011 .6. NOTE The interface may be operated using the Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH LCR100 Level 1 Maintenance Set. AHRU Input / Connector/Pin J4-09 J4-51 J4-30 J4-02 J4-22 Not connected J4-39 and J4-60 connected together (mandatory) Honeywell FX-Series.6 4.5 MSU (Flux Valve) Interface The system provides a 400 Hz excitation voltage for the flux valve. The system utilizes the three 800 Hz signals that are provided by the flux valve to calculate and/or determine a heading value and the horizontal magnetic field strength. TECSTAR A B C D E F Bendix/King KMT 112 D A B H E Table 1-79 4. 4.2). They work with an excitation voltage of either 23.5 VAC (Honeywell/TECSTAR) or 12. The excitation voltage is adjustable to both flux valve types by the program pin MSU Excitation Voltage Select (refer to section 1.1.1 MSU (Flux Valve) Interconnections Test Interface RS-422 The system provides two RS-422 asynchronous interfaces without hardware handshake with a minimum baud rate of 9600 Bd. One interface will be used for maintenance. The system is capable to process the signals of both flux valve types.6. paragraph 4. The system can be operated with two different types of flux valves: Sperry type and Bendix King type.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.

1 Selftest Outputs Selftest Data Output on Ground Functional selftest can be activated when aircraft is on ground and the selftest data discrete is activated. -3000 and -6xxx) Only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1065 July 2011 .3 Ethernet The system provides one Ethernet interface 10/100 BaseT for maintenance and test purposes.1 g Table 1-80 Analogue Selftest Outputs Output Signal Selftest Value System valid Basic Mode set / Yaw Rate invalid Attitude Mode Autopilot Heading invalid Attitude invalid Heading 1 invalid Heading 2 invalid Turn Rate invalid Discrete Output System Warn Basic Mode Annunciator (1) / Yaw Rate Warn (2) ATT Mode Annunciator Autopilot Heading Interlock Attitude Warn Heading Warn 1 Heading Warn 2 Turn Rate Warn Table 1-81 1) 2) Discrete Selftest Outputs Only applicable for systems without synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx.6. The analogue and discrete selftest outputs shall be as defined in Table 1-80 and Table 1-81.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4. Table 1-46 and Table 1-47. The digital selftest values are defined in Table 1-45. Output Signal Synchro and 2 wire AC Output Magnetic Heading 1 Magnetic Heading 2 Pitch Roll DC Voltage Output Slaving Error Yaw Rate Turn Rate Normal Acceleration Selftest Value 15 deg 15 deg + 5 deg + 45 deg + 15 deg + 6 deg/s + 3 deg/s + 0. NOTE The interface may be operated using the Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH LCR100 Level 1 Maintenance Set. 5 5.

1) to 0.2. Increased reliability will result from operation with the optional cooling fan.2. paragraph 4.4. The selftest data command on ground supersedes the Normal Acceleration Test output. paragraph 4. the system sets the Normal Acceleration DC Output (refer to section 1. 6 Cooling Requirements In order to improve system reliability.1. the AHRU mounting tray optionally incorporates an integral cooling fan.0 g).0 VDC (= 0. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1066 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5. independent on the Air/Ground status.3.3) is set.2 Normal Acceleration Test Enable When the Normal Acceleration Test Enable Discrete (refer to section 1.

strobe and/or position lights. paragraph 4.2. 7. this indicates a fault and it is not possible to enter MSU calibration mode. Any initial aircraft heading can be used. A reference direction is not required. When the procedure has been completed. an initial rough alignment may be made followed by the calibration procedure. To ensure that all of the factors for which compensation is required are present. Particular attention should be paid to systems in the neighborhood of the MSU. the procedure does not require any supporting equipment. The calibration mode will be activated by the MSU calibration discrete (refer to section 1. During the compass swing procedure the aircraft is turned clockwise to eight different headings about 45° apart. a MSU is detected at power on and no motion is detected.3) or by the mode button if the alignment is completed and the aircraft is determined to be on ground (ground/air discrete is set for aircraft on ground). For LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS systems P/N 145130-1xxx. The MSU Calibration Algorithm is able to compensate the MSU errors (sum of Single and dual cycle errors) of up to 12 degrees. When a new MSU is installed. The aircraft can be rotated about its vertical axis or taxied in a circle to align with the required headings. These headings are indicated on the appropriate system’s primary heading indicator. the procedure must be performed with the engine(s) running and all electrical systems used in flight are to be switched on. RMI). -2xxx and -3000 the MSU calibration mode can only be entered when the system operates in attitude mode and a MSU has been detected at power on. When the procedure has been completed. It is recommended to perform the swing on a compass rose at the airport or alternatively using a calibrated master compass to align the aircraft during the swing.1 MSU (Flux Valve) Calibration Procedure General Statements and Premises An automatic MSU calibration procedure is implemented in the AHRU software. The displayed heading and the heading flag are used to reach the 8 required headings and to DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1067 July 2011 . The procedure must be performed in a position without local disturbances of the earth’s magnetic field as no compensation for such disturbances can be made. The MSU calibration mode is indicated by a continuous illuminating of the LED at the front plate of the system. a ± 5° error in spacing is acceptable.2 Compass Swing The MSU Calibration Procedure requires execution of a compass swing.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 7 7. pitot tube heating etc. the aircraft should be aligned with a reference direction and the MSU alignment adjusted until the residual index error is removed and the correct heading is indicated. If the LED flashes. both single and dual cycle magnetic disturbances produced by the aircraft and its systems are practically eliminated. The commands of the mode button will be accepted when it is pressed continuously for more than 2 seconds. The operator supervises the procedure via the aircraft instruments (HSI.1.

which can only be switched on in the air. Refer to the detailed procedure which follows this general description. If the flag does not disappear. including the initial position. the MSU calibration mode is engaged. this indicates a fault and it is not possible to enter the MSU calibration mode. If the Air/Ground discrete indicates that the aircraft is in the air. 90°. For discrete words refer to Table 1-67. As long as a heading change is less than 5° of the calibration mode's initial position. After the compensation factors have been calculated. the heading system may exhibit uncompensated errors during flight. In each of the eight positions. The value indicated is the standard deviation of the residual error multiplied by 100. the heading warn flag is removed from view on this display. 135°. This means that headings do not have to be calculated by the ground crew. the next required heading is always the next multiple of 45° ± 5° (e. A way should be found to switch them on without changing the "On Ground" indication to AHRU. the heading relative to the initial procedure heading is displayed. AHRU replacement does not require a MSU calibration. This enables manual checks on the input error for different headings. the system accepts heading from the MSU. The time required for data collection depends on aircraft movements caused for example by wind or propeller rotation. During data collection and the turns between the heading positions the Heading Warn Flag is displayed. When the calibration was successful. The IDM is attached to the AHRU mounting tray. 45°. If the LED flashes. If the Air/Ground discrete indicates that the aircraft is on the ground. the normal attitude mode of operation remains selected. At the end of each data collection period the flag disappears to indicate that the turn to the next heading can be started.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 determine when the next heading change is to be made. the system calculates the compensation factors and stores this data in the IDM. the heading display is switched to an indication of the quality of the compensation available. When the heading change is 5° different from the initial procedure heading.g. 180° etc. The calibration mode is selected by either the mode button switch on the front panel (by pressing it continuously for more than 2 seconds) of the LCR-100 AHRU or by setting the MSU Cal Discrete. In this case the procedure must be started again. The Attitude Warn flag is displayed throughout the performance of the procedure. must remain off. the displayed heading is the input received from the MSU. NOTE If Electrical systems. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1068 July 2011 .). After data has been collected for each of the eight headings. it indicates that either the heading is outside the ± 5° tolerance or data has not been correctly collected because of excessive aircraft motion.

the LCR-100 will use the previously stored compensation data when the unit senses the "in-air" state. the system returns to normal mode automatically 10 s after indication of the residual heading error or if the mode button has been activated again (continuously pressed for more than 2 s). The indicated results are not stored in the IDM and the last valid values are retained. 0° 315° 45° 270° 90° 225° 135° 180° LIT00036 Figure 1-5 Compass Swing DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1069 July 2011 . the procedure failed. The display of these flags should prevent flight with the switch in this position. However if the aircraft takes off despite the warning. If the MSU calibration mode has been entered by the mode button (MSU calibration discrete disabled). All warning flags disappear and normal operation is resumed. the system returns to normal mode by disabling the MSU calibration discrete. After a successful calibration. The heading will be as accurate as the previously stored MSU compensation data allows. the attitude warn flag is displayed during a ground run. If the MSU CAL MODE is selected accidentally. ensuring that magnetic heading is valid while in the air.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 If the heading warn flag continues to be displayed.

paragraph 5. Notes 1) In the Index Error Correction (IEC) Mode the system accepts values from -5 deg to +5 deg on BCD ARINC label 043.5). switch the System back to MAG (2). Procedure 1 Set the System to MSU calibration mode (refer to section 2.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 7. Use the slew left/right switch to set the desired heading (note that the correction is limited to ± 5. Multiple entries will not be summed up. 2) A new IEC value will be stored only when the IEC Mode will be left by switching back from DG to MAG. Set the system to MSU calibration mode (refer to section 2. switch the system back to MAG (2).0 degrees) or use the Set Magnetic Heading Command ARINC Label 043 to enter the correction value numerically (1). If the IEC Mode is left by either switching off MSU Calibration Mode or by switching off system power a new IEC value will not be stored and the formerly stored value will be retained. Switch to DG (if the system was set to DG before. Procedure 2 Point the aircraft to some known heading (within ± 0. switch to MAG and back to DG) The HSI will now indicate the calibrated magnetic heading (Compass Swing Calibration) but without formerly stored index error correction. Use the slew left/right switch to set the desired heading (note that the correction is limited to ± 5. The last entered value will be utilized as Index Error Correction value. When the desired heading is set. or (2) Only the index error can be compensated. There are two possibilities for inserting the index error correction in the MSU calibration mode: (1) After a normal compass swing the index error can be compensated. paragraph 5.5) Perform a compass swing After the compass swing is completed. When the desired heading is set.5 degrees). The HSI will now indicate the corrected heading.5 degrees) The HSI will now indicate the calibrated magnetic heading (Compass Swing Calibration) but without formerly stored index error correction. switch to DG and point the aircraft to some known heading (within ± 0. The HSI will now indicate the corrected heading.3 Index Error Compensation Procedure The index error of the MSU is not compensated by the automatic MSU calibration. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1070 July 2011 .0 degrees) or use the Set Magnetic Heading Command ARINC Label 043 to enter the correction value numerically (1).

HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears A/C to 135° indic. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears A/C to 90° indic. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears A/C to 270° indic. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears Indication of the residual error on compass: _____ HDG Flag out of view ATT Flag out of view If the index error shall be corrected continue with test steps listed in sub-paragraph "Index Error Correction" listed below. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears       A/C to 315° indic. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears A/C to 225° indic. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears A/C to 180° indic. all flags out of view Enable the MSU CAL MODE Discrete ATT Flag in view HDG Flag in view Initial HDG indication: _____ HDG Flag disappears A/C to 45° indic. Otherwise:  disable the MSU CAL MODE Discrete Index Error Correction      Set A/C to Reference HDG Switch to DG Use slew left/right to set HDG or set the correction value numerically by using the Set MAG HDG command Switch to MAG MSU CAL MODE "OFF" DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1071 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 7.4 MSU Calibration Procedure/Checklist by using the MSU calibration discrete Compass Swing                             Aircraft (A/C) in location with no external magnetic disturbances engine(s) running all electrical equipment switched on AHRS switched on alignment completed.

HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears A/C to 315° indic. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1072 July 2011 . System switches back to Normal Mode automatically after 10s when the residual error is displayed Otherwise:  Index Error Correction     Set A/C to Reference HDG Use slew left/right to set HDG or set the correction value numerically by using the Set MAG HDG command Switch to MAG Systems switches back to Normal Mode automatically after 10s. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears A/C to 135° indic. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears Indication of the residual error on compass: _____ If the index error shall be corrected switch to DG mode within 10s when the residual error is displayed and continue with test steps listed in sub-paragraph "Index Error Correction" listed below. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears A/C to 90° indic.5 MSU Calibration Procedure/Checklist by using the mode button on the AHRU Compass Swing                       Aircraft (A/C) in location with no external magnetic disturbances engine(s) running all electrical equipment switched on AHRS switched on alignment completed. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears A/C to 270° indic.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 7. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears            A/C to 225° indic. HDG HDG Flag in view HDG Flag disappears A/C to 180° indic. all flags out of view Press the Mode button on the AHRU until the red LED illuminates continuously ATT Flag in view HDG Flag in view Initial HDG indication: _____ HDG Flag disappears A/C to 45° indic.

standard without Fan LCR-92/93 Mounting Tray.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8 Outline Drawings refer to Figure Component/Description AHRU AHRU (Outline Drawing LCR-100) AHRU Front View MSU . ruggedized without Fan LCR-100 Mounting Tray.Installation Data Module IDM Outline Drawing Figure 1-6 Figure 1-7 Figure 1-8 Figure 1-9 Figure 1-10 Figure 1-11 Figure 1-12 Figure 1-13 Figure 1-14 Figure 1-15 Figure 1-16 Figure 1-17 Figure 1-18 DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1073 July 2011 . standard with Fan LCR-92/93 Mounting Tray. ruggedized with Fan IDM . TECSTAR FX-120/FX-600/FV-1 MSU Honeywell FX-125/220 CCU . ruggedized without Fan LCR-92/93 Mounting Tray.Compass Control Unit CCU Outline and Mounting Diagram Mounting Trays LCR-100 Mounting Tray. ruggedized with Fan LCR-92/93 Mounting Tray.Magnetic Sensor Units MSU Bendix/King KMT 112 MSU Honeywell.

1.5 33 6.9 8.25 +X +Z +X +Y 60.4 .4 71.5±0.6 79.1+0. .1 26.2 94.145130-1XXX. .8 102 MAX 13. .1 ± 5 33 96.5 LS 48 59±5 7+0.25 13+0.4 87.145130-6XXX S2 CENTER OF GRAVITY LCR-100 P/N: .1 255 S1/S2 DS S1/S2 95.8 MODE BUTTON 10 3±5 S1 S2 LS 117 ± 5 125 ± 5 HS 61 ± 5 62 ± 5 DS 1±5 0.1 8.145130-2XXX.2 256±0.1 20 23.5 33 7 +0.1 61±5 HS 128 MAX 94.145130-7XXX CENTER OF GYRO MEASUREMENT AXES J6 J3 J3 LED J5 J1 WEIGHT: LCR-100 WITH SYNCHRO INTERFACE (P/N 145130-2XXX AND -7XXX): LESS THAN 2.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8.1 33.25 13. LI0006R6 Figure 1-6 AHRU Outline DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1074 July 2011 J2 32.5 30 AIR INLET 278 MAX Ø3.1 AHRU AHRU Outlines 33.1 20 23.145130-3000.1 -0.8 S1 CENTER OF GRAVITY LCR-100 P/N: .1 -0.95 KG. LCR-100 WITHOUT SYNCHRO INTERFACE (P/N 145130-1XXX. -3000 AND -6XXX): LESS THAN ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.25 13.

Figure 1-7 Front View of AHRU DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1075 July 2011 .1.2 AHRU Front View Synchro Connector 1J3 is only available for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx).Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8.

Bendix/King Outline LIT00008 Figure 1-8 KMT 112 MSU Outline and Mounting Diagram DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1076 July 2011 .1 Magnetic Sensor Units (MSU) MSU.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8.2 8.2.

2 MSU. Honeywell.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8. TECSTAR Outlines LIT00009 Figure 1-9 FX-120/FX-600/FV-1 MSU Outline and Mounting Diagram DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1077 July 2011 .2.

062 DIA AS SHOWN (6-40 THD) 0.375 OF FLIGHT 1.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8. SPACED AS SHOWN ON 2.3 MSU. LENGTH TO BE DETERMINED BY PANEL THICKNESS 20° 3 PLACES 10° 3 PLACES 4.062 DIA FORWARD DIRECTION 3.343 -0.010 0.2.083 3 PLACES 0.168 3 PLACES 120° 3-ELASTIC STOP NUTS CAT. NO.875 DIA TOL NOT TO BE CUMULATIVE 150° 3/ 32 1 5/16 3 19/64 DIA MAX 40° 2 3/8 MAX 2 7/8 MAX 20° 20° 1 11/16 SPHERICAL R 3 37/64 DIA 40° 150° LIT00010 Figure 1-10 FX-125/220 MSU Outline and Mounting Diagram DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1078 July 2011 .083 DIA CSK HO RIVETS TO BE FLUSH WITH MOUNTING PANEL FACE. Honeywell Outlines TOP PANEL MOUNTING 0. 68NA1-60 EQUALLY SPACED ON 4.003 DIA THRU 2 HOLES 0.648R 1/2 R 120° +0.968 4 25/32 DIA MAX BOTTOM PANEL MOUNTING 4-40 UNC 38 7/32 DEEP 6 HOLES.

3 Compass Control Unit (CCU) Outlines LIT00011 Figure 1-11 CCU Outline and Mounting Diagram DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1079 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8.4 8.4.1 Mounting Trays Mounting Tray. without Fan (LCR-100 type) Figure 1-12 Mounting Tray P/N 145137-0100 Outline – without Fan DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1080 July 2011 . ruggedized.

ruggedized.4.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8.2 Mounting Tray. with Fan (LCR-100 type) Figure 1-13 Mounting Tray P/N 145138-0100 Outline – with Fan DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1081 July 2011 .

5 ± 0.2 ± 0.98 .2 262 ± 0.2 98 ± 0.3 AB A A Ø5 MOUNTING HOLES A (4x) A B 80 ± 0.2 5.3 172 ± 2 AHRU MOUNTING PLANE 26.5 12 ± 2 343.2 82 ± 0.2 80 ± 0.15 NM (19.8 0. standard. without Fan (LCR-92/93 type) MOUNTING SURFACES TO AHRU CENTER OF GRAVITY WEIGHT: LESS THAN 0.5 ± 1.5 106 MAX SECTION B-B SCALE 1:1 290 ± 1 8 ± 0.2 66 ± 0.2 Ø9 0.5 B ± 0.0.98.5 8 ± 0.0.03 A 12.4.5 in-lbs) Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1082 July 2011 .5 AB B 8.98 .1 A 19 ± 0.2 155 ± 0.5 MAX 15.5 ± 0.2 TOP VIEW SHOWN WITHOUT FRONT HOLD DOWN ASSEMBLY Figure 1-14 Mounting Tray P/N 124260-0000 Outline – without Fan Mounting Tray.35 kg ALL DIMENSIONS IN MM FOR TRAY MOUNTING USE MOUNTING SCREWS WITH THREAD SIZE M4 OR 8-32 UNC AND WASHER WITH MAX 10MM OUTSIDE DIAMETER TORQUE FOR MOUNTING SCREWS: 2.2 119 ± 0.2 103 ± 0.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8.4 Mounting Tray. with Fan (LCR-92/93 type) Figure 1-15 Mounting Tray P/N 140691-0000 Outline – with Fan DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1083 July 2011 .4. standard.

4. ruggedized.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8. without Fan (LCR-92/93 type) Figure 1-16 Mounting Tray P/N 144201-0000 Outline – without Fan DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1084 July 2011 .5 Mounting Tray.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8. ruggedized. with Fan (LCR-92/93 type) Figure 1-17 Mounting Tray P/N 144200-0000 Outline – with Fan DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1085 July 2011 .4.6 Mounting Tray.

7 Installation Data Module (IDM) On delivery.4.9 in-lbs) PIN 1 PIN 5 20 100±10 To be fastened with a torque of 0.5 +0.4 +0.1 Nm (3.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 8. connector will be fitted with a dustcap Nylon strap To be connected to AHRU-connector J5 To be fastened with a torque of 0.035 KG ALL DIMENSIONS IN MM 16 LI0018R7 Figure 1-18 IDM P/N 124282-xxxx Outline DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1086 July 2011 5 55 .9 ±0.0 ±0.05 Nm (8.5 in-lbs) 36 25 MINIMUM MATING ENVELOPE 35 31 WEIGHT: LESS THAN 0.

Refer to section 1.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 9 System Wiring The following notes apply where indicated. 100 mA The following two assignments are valid for all LCR100 versions except 145130-6200 + 28 VDC_SGS_REF 28 VRTN_SAV_REF + 28 VDC_SGS_REF 28 VRTN_SAV_REF 05 13 13 05 O O O O 24 24 24 24 100 mA The following two assignments are valid for the LCR100 version 145130-6200 Table 1-82 Pin Assignment J1 Power Supply DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1087 July 2011 . 2 A max. 2 A max.1 Signal + 28 VDC PRIM A/C POWER + 28 VDC PRIM A/C POWER 28 VDC PRIM RETURN 28 VDC PRIM RETURN + 28 VDC AUX A/C POWER + 28 VDC AUX A/C POWER 28 VDC AUX RETURN 28 VDC AUX RETURN + 28 VDC CCU/DISCRETES 28 VDC RETURN CCU + 28 VDC MAGNETOMETER POWER 28 VDC RETURN MAGNETOMETER AUX POWER ANNUNCIATOR Signals and Pin Assignment J1 (Power Supply) Pin 01 09 02 10 03 11 04 12 08 15 06 14 07 O In/Out I I I I I I I I O O AWG 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 24 24 24 24 24 Signal Format Aircraft 28 VDC Aircraft 28 VDC Aircraft DC Power Ground Aircraft DC Power Ground Aircraft 28 VDC Aircraft 28 VDC Aircraft DC Power Ground Aircraft DC Power Ground 28 VDC for CCU and SAV Input Discretes 28 VDC Output Power Ground 28 VDC for Magnetometer 28 VDC Output Power Ground Ground signal (refer to section 1. paragraph 4. (3) MSU Shield Grounding .2) 28 VDC Reference for SGS Discretes GND Signal Reference for SAV Discretes 28 VDC Reference for SGS Discretes GND Signal Reference for SAV Discretes 100 mA 110 mA 100 mA Load 2 A max. (2) External Program Control . 2 A max. NOTES (1) Twisted and Shielded Wires . 2 A max. 2 A max. The Pigtail method shall be avoided. paragraph 3 for usage of external program control pins.Wires should be shielded or twisted and shielded as indicated with an insulating jacket over the shield: The shield should be carried through each break and should be connected at both ends externally to the equipment using metal backshell / strain relief of the respective connector (refer to Figure 1-21). 9. (4) The mating connectors with metric (M3) screw locks shall have preferably full metallic or at least metallized plastic backshells. 2 A max.The shielded multiple conductor cable carrying the sensitive signals from the MSU should have its shield grounded at the backshell of the respective connector. 2 A max.2.

8 Vrms 400 Hz (refer to section 1.1) 3 x (120 + j450)  1 mA RMS max.4.1.4.1) 3-Wire Synchro output 11. paragraph 4.2.3 Pin Assignment J2 Fan Supply Signals and Pin Assignment J3 (Synchro) J3 is only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx and -7xxx). 1 HI LO HI LO X(S1) Z(S2) Y(S3) HEADING SYNCHRO No.4. 3 x (120 + j450)  3 x (120 + j450)  Load 10 mA RMS max.4.8 Vrms 400 Hz (refer to section 1.1) 3-Wire Synchro output 11. paragraph 4.4.4. paragraph 4. paragraph 4.2.4. paragraph 4. Signal ATTITUDE REFERENCE HI LO PITCH SYNCHRO X(S1) Z(S2) Y(S3) ROLL SYNCHRO X(S1) Z(S2) Y(S3) HEADING 1 REFERENCE (serves heading synchro 1) HEADING 2 REFERENCE (serves heading synchro 2) HEADING SYNCHRO No.8 Vrms 400 Hz (refer to section 1.1) 26 Vrms AC 400 Hz sinusoidal (refer to section 1.2 Signal Signals and Pin Assignment J2 (Fan Supply) Pin 03 02 A B 04 05 01 06 07 08 09 In/Out O O I I AWG 24 24 24 24 Jumped to Pin 05 Jumped to Pin 04 Signal Format Load 100 mA max.1) 3-Wire Synchro output 11. 3 x (120 + j450)  DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1088 July 2011 .1) 26 Vrms AC 400 Hz sinusoidal (refer to section 1. 10 mA RMS max. paragraph 4.8 Vrms 400 Hz (refer to section 1.2. 2 X(S1) Z(S2) Y(S3) Pin 04 19 11 26 40 10 25 39 05 20 33 34 13 28 42 12 27 41 In/Out I I O O O O O O I I I I O O O O O O AWG 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts Signal Format 26 Vrms AC 400 Hz sinusoidal (refer to section 1.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 9.1.1) 3-Wire Synchro output 11. paragraph 4.2. + 24 VDC FAN POWER 24 VDC RETURN FAN TEST ENABLE FAN TEST ENABLE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE Table 1-83 9.1. 100 mA max.

paragraph 4.2. paragraph 4.2) 5 mV/deg Vrms 400 Hz (refer to section 1.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Signal PITCH AC 200 (167) mV/deg HI LO ROLL AC 200 (167) mV/deg HI LO PITCH AC 50 mV/deg ROLL AC 50 mV/deg ATTITUDE WARN DISCRETE HI LO HI LO A B HEADING WARN DISCRETE 1 A B HEADING WARN DISCRETE 2 A B TURN RATE WARN DISCRETE A B TURN RATE DC TURN RATE DC RETURN YAW RATE DC YAW RATE DC RETURN NORMAL ACCELERATION DC HI LO NORMAL ACC TEST ENABLE NORMAL ACC TEST REF HI LO HI LO Pin 09 24 07 22 08 23 06 21 03 18 32 17 16 01 02 31 15 30 43 14 29 44 37 38 36 35 O O I I O O In/Out O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O AWG 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 ts 24 ts 24 24 ts 24 ts 24 24 ts 24 ts 24 24 Signal Format 200 (167) mV/deg Vrms 400 Hz (refer to section 1.2) 50 mV/deg Vrms 400 Hz (refer to section 1. paragraph 4.2. paragraph 4.4.2) Relay Contact (refer to section 1. paragraph 4. paragraph 4.4. paragraph 4.2.2) Virtual Ground for rate 2-WIRE DC ± 4 V (refer to section 1.3.2. paragraph 4.2.2.2) Relay Contact (refer to section 1.4.2) Relay Contact (refer to section 1. paragraph 4.3. paragraph 4.4.2.2) Relay Contact (refer to section 1.4) Signal Reference for J3-36 1 k 1 k 1 k 110 mA 110 mA 110 mA 110 mA 10 k MIN 10 k MIN 5 k MIN Load 5 k MIN Table 1-84 Pin Assignment J3 Synchro Interface Module ts = twisted and shielded DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1089 July 2011 .2.3.2. paragraph 4.2.2.4.3) Virtual Ground for rate 2-Wire DC ± 4 V (refer to section 1.4.2) 2-Wire DC ± 4 V (refer to section 1.2) 200 (167) mV/deg Vrms 400 Hz (refer to section 1.4.

3) SAV Relay Contact (refer to section 1. 1 No. paragraph 4. to sec. paragraph 4.5) 800 Hz.3) SGS (refer to section 1.2.2. 1 No. paragraph 4. paragraph 4.2.4 Signal MSU Interface Signals and Pin Assignment J4 (Input/Output) Pin In/Out AWG Signal Format Load MSU EXCITATION MSU SIGNAL INPUT HI LO A B C 02 22 09 51 30 39 60 O O I I I O I O O 24 ts 24 ts 24 s 24 s 24 s 24 24 24 ts 24 ts 12-23 VRMS.2.2.2) SGS (refer to section 1.2.2. 2 No.1. paragraph 4.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 9.2. ref. 1.1.2/4.1.1) 1 k 10 31 32 14 35 34 54 12 01 43 17 53 11 23 38 55 57 04 56 16 58 37 52 25 44 24 62 20 O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O O 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 28 VRTN_SAV_REF Signal for program pins (refer to section 1. paragraph 4.1. 2 No.1.2. paragraph 4.3) SGS (refer to section 1.3) SGS (refer to section 1.1.1. paragraph 4. (refer to section 1. paragraph 4.2) 110 mA DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1090 July 2011 . paragraph 4.3) SGS (refer to section 1.2.3) SAV (refer to section 1.2) SGS (refer to section 1.1.1. paragraph 4.2.3) SGS (refer to section 1.2.1. paragraph 4.4.3) SAV (refer to section 1. paragraph 4. paragraph 4. 1 No. paragraph 4.2.1.1. paragraph 4. paragraph 4. paragraph 4. paragraph 4.5) Analogue DC. 2 (refer to section 1.2) SGS (refer to section 1.5) (refer to section 1.3) SGS (refer to section 1.3) SAV (refer to section 1.2.2) SAV (refer to section 1.2.2. paragraph 4.2.5 MSU MSU REFERENCE OUT MSU REFERENCE IN SLAVING ERROR HI LO Discretes PROG.2) SAV (refer to section 1. 400 Hz (refer to section 1.2.3) SGS (refer to section 1. paragraph 4.3.1.2.1.1. paragraph 4. PIN COMMON MOUNTING POSITION SOURCE DESTINATION IDENTIFIER DG MODE LOGIC SELECT GROUND/AIR LOGIC SELECT PARITY ARINC TURN RATE SELECT YR SCALE / DADS SELECT MSU EXCITATION VOLTAGE SELECT MSU CALIBRATION DISCRETE SELFTEST DATA ENABLE DG/MAG MODE SELECT ATT MODE SELECT GYROCOMPASS MODE SELECT SLEW LEFT SLEW RIGHT ON GND / IN AIR DISCRETE STORED HDG ALIGNMENT SYNCHRO TRUE/MAG HDG SELECT ARINC UPDATE RATE SELECT SPARE DISCRETE ATT MODE ANNUNCIATOR A B No.1.1.

2 A B GND 08 29 49 07 28 48 26 46 06 27 47 05 18 50 59 TIME MARK A HI LO 45 03 O O O O O O O O I I I I O O O I I 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 24 24 24 ts 24 ts GPS Time Mark Input.2) Relay Contact N.1 A B A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 INPUT DATA BUS No.1) ARINC-429. paragraph 4.3. (refer to section 1. HI/LO-Spd.1. (refer to section 1.3. paragraph 4. s = shielded DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1091 July 2011 .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Signal AUTOPILOT HEADING INTERLOCK A B SYSTEM WARN A C B YAW RATE WARN / BASIC MODE ANNUNCIATOR Digital Interfaces ARINC 429 OUTPUT DATA BUS No.1.1) ARINC-429.2) 110 mA 110 mA 110 mA Load 110 mA RESERVED 36 33 13 Table 1-85 Pin Assignment J4 ts = twisted and shielded.3.1) ARINC-429.2 ARINC 429 OUTPUT DATA BUS No.2. HI-Speed (refer to section 1. HI-Speed (refer to section 1.2.3.1) ARINC-429. paragraph 4.5.2.3. HI-Speed (refer to section 1. DADS Input.4 ARINC 429 INPUT DATA BUS No. paragraph 4. paragraph 4. paragraph 4.3.2.3 ARINC 429 OUTPUT DATA BUS No.2) Relay Contact (refer to section 1.C. paragraph 4. Relay Contact N.O.1 ARINC 429 OUTPUT DATA BUS No.2) ARINC-429. (refer to section 1.2. paragraph 4. paragraph 4.1.3.2. (refer to section 1.2. paragraph 4. HI-Speed (refer to section 1. DADS Input.2) Secondary Signal Ground A B Pin 19 40 21 15 42 41 61 In/Out O O O O O O O AWG 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 Signal Format Relay Contact (refer to section 1. HI/LO-Spd.) Must not be used simultaneously with Time Mark A input on J6 Pin 19/20 Not connected internally ARINC-429.

6 GND RS-232 IN_1 RS-232 OUT_1 GND DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1092 July 2011 .5 Signal Signals and Pin Assignment J5 (IDM) Pin 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 + 09 10 11 HI LO HI LO 12 13 14 15 In/Out O O O I O O I I I I O I I O O 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts AWG 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 Secondary Signal Ground Test and Maintenance For Lab Test only Test and Maintenance For Lab Test only Backup Battery in IDM TTL for lab test only Signal Format + 5 VDC DC POWER GROUND TTL Load + 5 VDC IDM POWER 5 VDC RETURN STXD SRXD STXCLK SPROMCS ENGINEERING MODE ENABLE COMMAND INTERFACE SELECT GPS Backup Battery Input GND RS-422 RXD RS-422 TXD Table 1-86 9.5 ARINC 429 OUTPUT DATA BUS No.3. HI-Speed (refer to section 1.1) ARINC-429. CDU/FMS Input HI/LO-Speed Secondary Signal Ground Test and Maintenance (refer to section 1. HI/LO-Speed ARINC-429.6.2.6 Signal Pin Assignment J5 ts = twisted and shielded Signals and Pin Assignment J6 (Input/Output and Test) Pin A B A B A B A B A B A B 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 In/Out O O O O O I I I I I I I I O I O O 24 s 24 s 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts AWG 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts Signal Format ARINC-429. HI-Speed (refer to section 1. paragraph 4. CDU/FMS Input HI/LO-Speed ARINC-429. GNSS Input B.3.1) Secondary Signal Ground ARINC-429.6 GND ARINC 429 INPUT DATA BUS No. paragraph 4.5 ARINC 429 INPUT DATA BUS No.3 ARINC 429 INPUT DATA BUS No. paragraph 4. HI/LO-Speed ARINC-429.2) Secondary Signal Ground Load ARINC 429 OUTPUT DATA BUS No. GNSS Input A.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 9.2.4 ARINC 429 INPUT DATA BUS No.

5 Must not be used simultaneously with Time Mark A input on J4 Pin 45/03 GPS Time Mark Input ref.5 In/Out I AWG 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 ts 24 ts Secondary Signal Ground Data Magnetometer (not used) Data Magnetometer (not used) Signal Format referenced to internal Ground (refer to section 1.6. paragraph 4.6.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Signal TEST MODE DISCRETE RESERVED Pin 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 RS422 TXD1 GND RS422 RXD1 Ethernet TX Ethernet RX GND Time Mark A HI LO Time Mark B Spare HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 I I I I O O O I I O O I I 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 s 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts 24 ts Test and Maintenance (refer to section 1.3) Spare Load Table 1-87 Pin Assignment J6 ts = twisted and shielded s = shielded DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1093 July 2011 .1. paragraph 4. paragraph 4.3) Secondary Signal Ground GPS Time Mark Input. paragraph 4. ref. to sec. 1.1.3.3) Test and Maintenance (refer to section 1. to section 1.1. paragraph 4.2.3.

8 AHRU/MSU Wiring Interconnection CCU/LCR-100 LIT00020 Figure 1-19 Interconnection Diagram CCU.09 1 . TECSTAR A B C D E F Bendix/King KMT 112 D A B H E AHRU Input Connector/Pin J4-09 J4-51 J4-30 J4-02 J4-22 not con.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 9.10 CCU P/N 140855-0010 CCU P/N 140855-0030 + 5 V (hot) PNLLITE (cold) CCU P/N 140855-0020 CCU P/N 140855-0040 + 28 VDC 28 VRTN Table 1-89 Interconnection CCU Panel Light Voltage DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1094 July 2011 . Table 1-88 9. LCR-100 PANEL LIGHT VOLTAGE (supplied by aircraft) CCU CCU 1 .7 AHRU/MSU Wiring Honeywell FX-Series.

J3.9 Shield Termination of Mating Connectors Mating Connectors J1. LI0022R2 Figure 1-21 Shield Termination of Connectors using Metal Backshell / Strain Relief Method DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1095 July 2011 . J4. overbraid is not required.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 LIT00021 Figure 1-20 Interconnection Diagram for Control Discretes 9. J6 Cable bundle Shield termination of shielded wires directly to strain relief.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 1 Page 1096 July 2011 .

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 SECTION 2 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G TITLE PAGE SECTION 2 July 2011 .

.

heading and flight dynamics (body rates and accelerations) information. Section 1. The LCR-100 Gyrocompass versions are equipped with inertial grade instruments which enable a gyrocompassing heading alignment. a Magnetic Sensor Unit (MSU) (optional for P/N 145130-1xxx. which are typically used for flight control and pilot displays. 4 Description Descriptive information pertaining to the AHRS units is provided in the following paragraphs: 4.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1 General This section provides on-aircraft maintenance procedures for the LCR-100 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS). DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2001 July 2011 . paragraph 1. 4. an Installation Data Module (IDM). paragraph 8.1 Location of Units in Aircraft Provided in section 1. contains information that can be pertinent to on-aircraft maintenance of the AHRS. MSU. paragraph 1. Augmented by air data the system also provides filtered inertial altitude and vertical velocity. After a gyrocompassing the system operates in navigation mode like an Inertial Reference System (IRS) in which it provides free inertial navigation position and velocity outputs additionally to the basic AHRS functions. that information should be used in conjunction with this section when applicable.2 Outline and Mounting Drawings Outline and mounting drawings for the AHRU.3 AHRU The system is mechanized as a strap down inertial measurement system using fiber optic rate sensors and micro-mechanic accelerometers which are "strapped down" to the principle aircraft axes. A system consists of an Attitude and Heading Reference Unit (AHRU). CCU. AHRU trays and IDM are provided in section 1. 4. -2xxx and -3000) and optionally a compass controller unit (CCU). A digital computer mathematically integrates the rate and acceleration data to obtain heading. pitch and roll attitude.4. 3 Leading Particulars Leading particulars for the AHRS are provided in section 1. Installation Data. 2 Purpose of Equipment The LCR-100 is an all attitude inertial sensor system which provides aircraft attitude. Location. Installation Instructions.

The IDM provides the capability to store the following installation data: Stored installation data MSU Calibration data (including index error compensation) GNSS antenna lever arms for both GNSS input from the AHRU to the antenna (refer to Figure 3-9) Lever arms from the AHRU to the center of gravity (refer to Figure 3-10) GNSS maximum delay time (time mark to latest related GNSS data set) Misalignment compensation data Programming constant for activation of processing the Label 350 on the DADS input MagVar Model Data (WMM Data) Standard IDM 124282-0000 X X X X X X Extended IDM 124282-2xxx X X X X X X X Table 2-1 CAUTION Installation data that can be stored in the IDM The IDM must be installed (connected with AHRU) in any case. calibration. The IDM is mechanically connected with the Tray and connected to the AHRU via connector J5.or compensation-data again.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4. even if no data are stored in it! DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2002 July 2011 . The compensation values stored in the IDM are aircraft specific.4 IDM Figure 2-1 Installation Data Module (IDM) The IDM is an external detachable device that provides the capability to store installation data. As long as the Tray is mounted to the A/C the installation data are valid for any LCR-100 AHRU that is mounted into this Tray without the need to determine installation-.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4. Operation in Navigation Mode is not certified for these trays. -2xxx and -3000 use the trays: P/N: 145137-0100 (LCR-100 ruggedized tray without fan) P/N: 145138-0100 (LCR-100 ruggedized tray with fan) Operation in Navigation Mode is only certified for these trays. Figure 2-2 Mounting Tray without fan (Example) To achieve the specified inertial navigation performance of LCR-100 Gyrocompass-Systems with P/N 145130-1xxx. All LCR-100 Standard Systems with P/N 145130-6xxx or -7xxx can also be installed in trays: P/N: 124260-0000 (LCR-92/93 standard tray without fan) P/N: 140691-0000 (LCR-92/93 standard tray with fan) For helicopter applications of LCR-100 Standard Systems with P/N 145130-6xxx or -7xxx the following listed ruggedized trays are recommended as minimum: P/N: 145137-0100 (LCR-100 ruggedized tray without fan) P/N: 145138-0100 (LCR-100 ruggedized tray with fan) P/N: 144201-0000 (LCR-92/93 ruggedized tray without fan) P/N: 144200-0000 (LCR-92/93 ruggedized tray with fan) The specified performance under environmental conditions (DO-160E section 8): "High level short duration sinusoidal vibration" and "Helicopter sine on random vibration" is not certified for the trays: P/N: 124260-0000 (LCR-92/93 standard tray without fan) P/N: 140691-0000 (LCR-92/93 standard tray with fan) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2003 July 2011 . LCR-100 System with P/N 145130-1002 can also be installed in trays: P/N: 144201-0000 (LCR-92/93 ruggedized tray without fan) P/N: 144200-0000 (LCR-92/93 ruggedized tray with fan) if operated in Attitude Mode only. Trays with fan are recommended to achieve additional reliability margin.5 Mounting Tray The LCR-100 is designed to fit in all mounting trays listed in Overview-Table 1-3.

In an airplane it can usually be found in the wingtip or in the horizontal or vertical tail section. In helicopters MSUs are usually located in the tail boom assembly. These areas are selected to minimize interference by ferromagnetic materials and magnetic fields generated by the aircraft. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2004 July 2011 . Figure 2-3 Magnetic Sensor Unit (Example) The magnetic sensor unit detects the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field and transmits it to the AHRU for use as long term heading reference.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.6 MSU MSU's can optional be used in conjunction with Standard AHRS systems LCR-100 with P/N 145130-6xxx and -7xxx.

The CCU contains controls and annunciators to facilitate manual slaving of the AHRU to the MSU and provides the following additional capabilities to the AHRS: Setting of compass heading during free gyro (DG) mode operation. LI0032R2 Figure 2-4 Compass Control Unit The CCU allows crew selection of either DG or slaved magnetic modes. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2005 July 2011 . This position can be entered by a CDU (Control and Display Unit) or similar equipment (e. MAG or free gyro (DG) operation mode selection. -2xxxx and -3000): For operating in navigation mode the system requires the external input of geographical position during gyrocompassing.7. Without a position entry the system cannot finish the gyrocompassing.g. Nulling of compass error after alignment in areas of high magnetic disturbances.2 Control and Monitoring Device Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. 4. Fast slaving during operation at extreme latitudes. Applicable for all LCR-100 variants: Other commands like mode selections can be entered by a CDU or switches.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.7 4.7. FMS (Flight Management System)). A slaving error annunciator and slew switch are provided for setting the compass heading in DG mode and to provide an indication of synchronization in slaved magnetic mode. The slew switch may also be used to manually correct heading information during operation in extreme latitudes.1 Control CCU A CCU can optional be used in conjunction with Standard AHRS systems LCR-100 with P/N 145130-6xxx and -7xxx.

2.5) (1) Gyrocompassing (para.4.3.5. 5. 5.3.1) Basic Attitude Mode (para.5. -2xxx and -3000) The current operating mode of the system is indicated in the ARINC 429 system discrete status word 270.4.2) IRS Heading Alignment (para.1) Stored Heading Alignment (para.4) Magnetic Heading Alignment (para. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2006 July 2011 .3) (1) Navigation Mode (para.5) Power Down (para.4.6) Maintenance Test Mode (para.3) AHRS Heading Alignment (para.3) Attitude Alignment (para. 5. 5.3.2) Alignment after Short Power Interrupt (para.2) Alignment (para. 5.2) Normal Attitude Mode (para. 5.3. 5.4.4) IRS Operation Modes (para.3.3) Directional Gyro Mode (para. 5. 5. 5. in DG Mode (para. 5.3.4.2.1 Modes of Operation Overview and Mode Transition The system provides the following modes of operation (all cross-references refer to paragraphs in section 2): Startup (para.3) MSU Calibration Mode (para. 5. 5.4.4.4. 5. 5.2) Slaved Heading Mode (para.1) Attitude Mode (para.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5 5. 5.4) AHRS Operation Modes (para.1) Magnetic Heading Init.2.3.4. 5.4.4.8) (1) Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1xxx.2) Realignment Mode (para.3. 5. 5. 5.6) Normal Operation Modes (para.3.3. 5. 5.3.2. 5.

HDG Alignment Mag.3.2 Navigation Mode on ground no motion motion detected Attitude Mode selected Normal Attitude Mode MSU available DG Mode selected Basic Attitude Mode MSU available DG Mode selected MAG Mode DG Mode MAG Mode DG Mode Realignment Mode Power Off switch switch Normal Operation Normal Operation MSU Cal.4 Attitude Mode selected Attitude Alignment Gyrocompassing Stored HDG Alignment Alignment Alignment completed Attitude Alignment Mag.3 5.4.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 IRS Operation (default mode) Maintenance Test Mode selected and on ground AHRS Operation (reversionary mode) Power switched on: Startup 5.4. Heading Init (DG) Alignment after SPI Alignment Alignment completed TAS valid/ available TAS invalid/ not available 5.3 5.5 MSU Calibration Mode LIT00040 Figure 2-5 Mode Transition Diagram for Gyrocompass AHRS DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2007 July 2011 .3 5.8 Maintenance Test Mode 5. Disabled or in air 5.6 Power Down 5.3.5 5.2 Startup completed and on ground Gyrocompass Short Power Command Interrupt and on ground on ground Attitude Mode selected Short Power Interrupt in air Startup completed and in air 5.3.3. Enabled and on ground MSU Cal.

HDG Alignment Mag.4 5.4.6 Power Down 5.3 / 5. Disabled or in air 5.2 Power switched on: Startup Startup completed 5. Enabled and on ground MSU Cal.5 MSU Calibration Mode LIT00039R2 Figure 2-6 Mode Transition Diagram for Standard AHRS DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2008 July 2011 . Heading Init (DG) Alignment after SPI Alignment Alignment completed TAS valid/ available TAS invalid/ not available 5.2 Normal Attitude Mode MSU available DG Mode selected Basic Attitude Mode MSU available DG Mode selected MAG Mode DG Mode MAG Mode DG Mode switch switch Power Off Normal Operation MSU Cal.8 Maintenance Test Mode Attitude Alignment Mag.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Maintenance Test Mode selected and on ground 5.3.3.

All Modes – IRS Alignment The system enters the IRS alignment  if the gyrocompass command is selected and the aircraft is determined to be on ground.1. -2xxx and 3000) The default mode transition without input commands and with gyrocompassing conditions is as follows: Startup – to – IRS Alignment – to – Navigation Mode The following mode transitions are possible: Startup – to – IRS Alignment The system enters the IRS alignment  after completion of the startup if the aircraft is determined to be on ground.1 IRS Operation Mode Transitions (Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS Systems LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1xxx. IRS Alignment – to – Navigation Mode The system enters the Navigation mode  if the attitude alignment and the gyrocompassing are finished and the gyrocompassing plausibility test is passed  or if the stored heading alignment is completed. IRS Alignment – to – AHRS Alignment The system switches from IRS to AHRS alignment  if the attitude mode command is selected. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2009 July 2011 . Navigation Mode – to – Attitude Mode The system switches from the navigation mode to the attitude mode  if the attitude mode command is selected. Realignment Mode – to – Navigation Mode The system switches from the realignment mode to the navigation mode  if motion is detected or the aircraft goes in air. Navigation Mode – to – Realignment Mode The system switches from the navigation mode to the realignment mode  if the aircraft is on ground and no motion is detected. Realignment Mode – to – Attitude Mode The system switches from the realignment mode to the attitude mode  if the attitude mode command is selected.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5.

AHRS Operation – to – MSU Calibration The system switches from AHRS operation to the MSU Calibration Mode  if the MSU Calibration command is selected and the aircraft is determined to be on ground. MSU Calibration – to – AHRS Operation The system switches from the MSU Calibration Mode to AHRS operation   if the MSU Calibration command is deselected or if the aircraft is determined to be in air.1. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2010 July 2011 . -2xxx and 3000) The system enters the AHRS alignment   if the system is powered up in air (incl. short power interrupt) or if the attitude mode command is selected. Startup – to – AHRS Alignment Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. AHRS Alignment – to – AHRS Operation The system enters the AHRS operation  after completion of the AHRS alignment.2 AHRS Operation Mode Transitions Startup – to – AHRS Alignment Only applicable for Standard-AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-6xxx and -7xxx) The system enters the AHRS alignment  after completion of the startup.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5.

The startup mode comprises the following functions: The inertial sensors and all interfaces are initialized and started. The alignment mode is completed if both attitude and heading alignment are completed. During startup the system indicates the aligning / not ready status in Bit 11 of output Label 270. Attitude and heading alignment are performed simultaneously. The system determines if there was a short or long power interrupt prior to this power on. In the alignment mode the system determines the orientation of the aircraft axes to the local gravity vector and the north direction. Startup time for LCR-100 Startup time for MOD-Status ≤ MOD22 Startup time for MOD-Status = MOD23 Ambient Temperature 0 °C to + 50 °C < 0 °C or > 50 °C 5s 6s ≤ 25 s ≤ 25 s Table 2-2 Startup time The system accepts ARINC command input 2 seconds after power up. the IRS alignment in which a gyrocompassing is performed and the AHRS alignment in which the magnetic heading will be initiated by a MSU or manually by input commands. The AHRS alignment can be performed on ground and in air. The system performs a power up BIT (PBIT). ARINC Status words) are set invalid. The Gyrocompassing finds the true north direction.3 5. All output data with the exception of the status data (e.3. After completion of the startup mode the system outputs valid body angular rates and body accelerations.1 Alignment General In the alignment mode the attitude and the heading alignment will be performed. the system continuously monitors and outputs the system status inclusive the system modes of operation. the alignment with a MSU finds the magnetic north direction.2 Startup The startup mode is automatically initiated when the system is powered up. When entering the alignment mode the system determines the status of the air/ground discrete input to set up the alignment conditions.g. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2011 July 2011 . This information will be needed during the alignment mode to control the alignment process. 5. The system determines the status of the ground/air discrete and whether the test mode discrete is set. The user-specified configuration settings stored in the installation data module (IDM) and programmed by the program discretes are loaded. Generally there are two different types of heading alignment available. One second after power on.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5.

The following paragraph up to "IRS Alignment" is applicable to LCR-100 System with P/N 145130-1001.3. IRS Alignment The IRS alignment is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. normal passenger and cargo-loading are within the specified stationary motion condition (refer to Table 2-3) envelope and will therefore not disturb the stationary alignment process. refer to section 1. paragraph 4. the alignment process indicator continues to increment by one degree per second. discrete output) are set invalid.g. -2xxx and -3000). During the heading alignment. The alignment time and the true heading accuracy of the gyrocompassing are affected by the latitude at which the system is aligned. ARINC SSM. Any interruption and restart of the alignment stops the countdown of the timer and resets the timer to the new estimated value.g. It is expected that motion induced by wind buffeting.2) the remaining alignment time based on the motion condition and the actual position.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 During the attitude alignment. The system estimates and outputs (ARINC Label 305. During the entire alignment the system increments the magnetic heading output (ARINC Label 320) by one degree per second starting at zero degree. The attitude alignment is finished within 20 seconds. the attitude and heading corresponding status indications (e. It can only be completed if the gyrocompassing is finished or the stored heading alignment has been performed. the heading corresponding status indications (e. If the alignment is not completed after 359 seconds (359 deg output). DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2012 July 2011 .3.2 Alignment Times The alignment times do not include the startup time (refer to Table 2-2) of the system. discrete output) are set invalid. At the end of the alignment process the incrementation stops and the true and magnetic heading output provides the estimated heading. 5. The alignment countdown is started after entering the alignment mode. ARINC SSM.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2013 July 2011 . The attitude and heading accuracy after alignment on ground are defined in paragraph 6. AHRS Alignment The AHRS alignment can be performed and completed under limited motion conditions. The alignment time depends on motion and will increase if the applied motion exceeds the specified limits. The limitations for the gyrocompassing are defined in Table 2-16. The system finishes the AHRS alignment under motion conditions within the time limits as defined in Table 2-3.3 for static or dynamic conditions.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 The system finishes the gyrocompassing within the times defined in Figure 2-7: 11 10 9 8 7 Time [min] 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Latitude [deg] Figure 2-7 Alignment Times for Gyrocompassing A gyrocompassing will only be performed if no motion is detected.2 and 6. The attitude and heading accuracy criteria for moving alignment in air and for on ship is ±2 deg in order to reduce the alignment time. For stationary alignment apply the static accuracy values and for moving alignment the dynamic accuracy values.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Motion Condition Stationary Alignment (on ground) Angular rates  ± 1°/s Period 1s Moving Alignment (on ground / in air) Angular rates  ± 5°/s (Period  2 s) Acceleration  ± 0.01g Heading changes  ± 5° (per 5seconds) (1) On Ship Alignment (2) Roll/Pitch Acceleration Acceleration Heading changes  ± 8° (Period  11 s) (max = 4.6°/s at 0.09 Hz)  ± 0.1 g (Period  11 s)  ± 0.01 g  ± 5° (per 5seconds)  300 s  300 s (3) Attitude Heading MSU slaved 20 s

20 s

 120 s

 120 s

Table 2-3
1) 2) 3)

AHRS Alignment Times under Motion Conditions

If true airspeed is available the attitude alignment is also performed during turns. Ship speed < 10 kts The ship influence may disturb the earth magnetic field up to ± 180 degrees.

5.3.3

Attitude Alignment

The system is capable to perform an attitude alignment without any external references within pitch and roll angles of ± 80°. If aligning in air (AHRS mode) and valid true airspeed (TAS refer to section 2, paragraph 5.9.1) information is available, the system uses TAS to correct for apparent gravity effects. After completion of the attitude alignment the attitude status indication is set valid. 5.3.4 5.3.4.1 AHRS Heading Alignment Magnetic Heading Alignment

This paragraph is only applicable if a MSU is available. The system performs a magnetic heading alignment with means of a MSU if slaved mode (MAG mode) is selected. Switching from DG to MAG mode during attitude alignment restarts the magnetic heading alignment. The system finishes the magnetic heading alignment if the tilt angle is ≤ ±15°. Temporarily invalid or unusable MSU data due to motion or external disturbances may increase the alignment time. After completion of the magnetic heading alignment and the attitude alignment the magnetic heading status indication is set valid.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2014 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

5.3.4.2

Magnetic Heading Initialization (DG Mode)

If powered up in DG mode, the system initializes the magnetic heading to zero degree (north). The magnetic heading is set valid as soon as a heading is entered from external by an ARINC command or by use of the slew discretes (Not applicable for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1001 and -1002). LCR-100 Systems with P/N 145130-1001 and -1002 set the magnetic heading valid at the end of the alignment phase without any external command. 5.3.5 NOTE This paragraph with its sub-paragraphs 5.3.5.1 and 5.3.5.2 is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx, -2xxx and -3000). 5.3.5.1 General The system performs a true heading alignment by gyrocompassing without any external references. After startup the gyrocompass mode is entered automatically if the conditions for a gyrocompassing are fulfilled and the attitude mode is not commanded. The gyrocompass mode can also be selected manually (refer to section 2, paragraph 5.7.2) to enter the mode during operation. During the gyrocompassing the heading corresponding status indications (e.g. ARINC SSM, discrete output) are set invalid. In gyrocompassing mode the system accepts position initialization commands (refer to section 2, paragraph 5.7.1). The no position initialization flag in the ARINC 429 discrete word 270 (refer to Table 1-53) is set until the position is initialized. The gyrocompassing is restarted if a gyrocompass command is received (transition from 0 to 1) during the gyrocompassing. If the gyrocompassing command is still selected at the completion of the gyrocompassing, the system remains in the gyrocompassing mode until the command is deselected. Gyrocompassing Conditions The gyrocompassing will be successfully completed at latitudes between 78.25 degrees south and 78.25 degrees north. If the latitude limit of ±78.25 degree is exceeded the system sets the extreme latitude flag in the ARINC 429 discrete word 270 (refer to Table 1-53) and remains in the gyrocompassing mode. The gyrocompass mode can only be entered if the aircraft is determined to be on ground. The aircraft must remain stationary during gyrocompass alignment. If excessive motion (refer to Table 2-16) is detected, the system sets the excessive motion flag in the ARINC 429 discrete word 270 (refer to Table 1-53) and stops the alignment process. If excessive motion is no longer detected, the system restarts a complete gyrocompass alignment and resets the excessive motion flag.
DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2015 July 2011

IRS Heading Alignment

Gyrocompassing

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

Alignment Completion Criteria To complete the gyrocompassing alignment the attitude of the system has to be valid and valid position (latitude and longitude) information has to be available. If the gyrocompassing was entered by a gyrocompass command during operation, the system uses the previously valid initialization position. Entering the initial position to complete multiple gyro compassing is necessary only once. The "no position initialization" flag remains "No". After a transition from "in-air" to "onground" a commanded gyro compassing needs a position update. The "no position initialization" flag bit 22 in ARINC Label 270 (refer to Table 1-53 and Table 1-55) shall be set to "Yes" until an initial position is available. Independent of the status of flag "no position initialization" a position update is possible all the time during the gyrocompassing phase. With valid latitude information, the system performs a plausibility test by determining the difference between the estimated horizontal earth rate and the horizontal earth rate calculated from the entered position. This difference is called the north gyro bias error. The gyrocompassing plausibility test will be passed if the north gyro bias error is less than 1°/h. The gyrocompassing will be completed if the plausibility test is passed. If the gyrocompassing is completed, the alignment time indications in Label 270 and 305 are set to zero. After a failed plausibility test, the test will be performed again if a new position is entered. NOTE The following paragraph is applicable to LCR-100 System with P/N 145130-1001 only. If the gyrocompass plausibility test at the end of the alignment fails the estimated true heading and a magnetic heading of zero degree is output but still flagged invalid.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2016 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

5.3.5.2

Stored Heading Alignment

In some applications (e.g. rescue aircraft) a faster alignment is required. If the aircraft has been remained stationary since last power off the stored heading alignment mode can accelerate the time to get into the navigation mode by using the heading stored at last power down. It is selectable by the stored heading alignment command. This command is accepted only during startup and gyrocompassing. The stored heading alignment mode is indicated with bit 24 in the ARINC discrete word 270 (refer to Table 1-53). If stored heading alignment is selected during gyrocompassing the system attempts to perform a stored heading alignment. After 90 seconds of gyrocompassing the stored heading alignment mode will be completed if the stored heading plausibility test is passed and position has been entered. The stored heading plausibility test compares the determined attitude and heading with the data stored at last power down. The limits of the plausibility test are as follows: difference in attitude: 0.25° max. difference in heading: 5° max. The heading comparison of the stored heading plausibility test will be disabled at latitudes higher than 70°. The gyrocompassing plausibility test and extreme latitude check are disabled for the stored heading alignment. If the stored heading alignment has been completed successfully the system initializes the heading with the value stored at the last power down. If the stored heading alignment is completed the alignment time indications in Label 270 and 305 are set to zero. If the plausibility test of the stored heading alignment fails, the system continues the normal gyrocompassing. 5.3.6 Alignment after Short Power Interrupt (SPI)

The unit will continue to operate normally for a period of time during a power interrupt. This period of time is at least 50 ms. Depending on the system configuration and condition this time period may be longer (e.g. system without synchro module). After this period of time the system shuts down. If the shut down duration is less than 500 ms the system tries to perform a fast realignment. After power interrupts with duration between 50 ms and 500 ms, the system performs a fast alignment of attitude and heading if following criteria are met: Estimated attitude change during power interrupt  5°
DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2017 July 2011

vertical acceleration A detailed list of the output parameter is given in Table 1-45. Valid acceleration data is output at latest 1 second after power up. Inertial navigation is not possible after a short power interrupt. magnetic heading) body rates. attitude. If the short power interrupt occurs during navigation mode the system operates in attitude mode after the fast alignment.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 The system will use last valid heading. If the short power interrupt occurs during normal operation the system outputs valid angular rates.4.1 Normal Operation Modes General Functions Depending on the operational mode and received external data.4. roll. The time of invalid magnetic heading is in the range of 5 to 10s but may increase depending on the validity of the MSU input. If the short power interrupt occurs during the realignment mode (on ground and no motion) the system restarts the realignment mode (Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems P/N -1xxx. The fast alignment is finished within 100ms after power is applied again. turn) body accelerations. The status of the ARINC command input Label 275 before the short power interrupt (SPI) is taken over after the interrupt. (Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems LCR-100 with P/N -1xxx. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2018 July 2011 . along/cross heading accelerations. the system provides different sets of data. If a transition from Navigation mode to ATT/MAG mode occurs the magnetic heading is aligned using MSU input. -2xxx and -3000). -2xxx and -3000). 5. 5. Euler rates (pitch. body rates and accelerations stored before the power interrupt. roll.1. -2xxx and -3000).1 Attitude and Heading Reference Data The system provides the following attitude and heading reference parameter: - Euler angles (pitch. If the short power interrupt occurs during the gyrocompassing the system restarts the gyrocompassing (Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems P/N -1xxx. The baro augmentation loop (inertial vertical navigation) and the hybrid platform will be newly initialized after a short power interrupt.4 5. During the magnetic heading alignment the magnetic heading is set invalid. attitude and magnetic heading after the fast heading alignment (except magnetic heading at the transition from navigation mode to ATT/MAG mode).

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

5.4.1.2

Inertial Vertical Navigation

If the system receives valid pressure altitude information form a digital air data system (DADS), it provides the following inertial vertical navigation parameter:
-

inertial vertical speed inertial altitude

The system provides a baro-inertial augmentation loop by using the pressure altitude information from the air data computer. If valid pressure altitude is not available for more than 5 seconds, the inertial altitude and inertial vertical speed output are set invalid.

5.4.1.3

Inertial Navigation

This paragraph is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 1451301xxx, -2xxx and -3000). In addition to attitude and heading reference data the system provides in navigation mode the following inertial calculated IRS data:
-

true heading position, magnetic variation track angle, track angle rate drift/flight path angle, flight path acceleration wind speed/direction N-S / E-W velocities, ground speed along/across track acceleration

A detailed list of the output parameter is given in Table 1-46. In navigation mode the LCR-100 calculates inertial reference data which are referenced to true north without any latitude limitations.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2019 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

5.4.1.4

Hybrid Navigation

This paragraph is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 1451301xxx, -2xxx and -3000). If valid GNSS data are received (refer to section 2, paragraph 5.9.2), the system provides the following hybrid data which are augmented by the GNSS information:
-

Hybrid true heading Hybrid position Hybrid track angle, hybrid track angle rate Hybrid drift/flight path angle, hybrid flight path acceleration Hybrid Wind speed /direction Hybrid N-S / E-W velocities, ground speed Hybrid along/across heading velocities Hybrid altitude, hybrid vertical velocity

A detailed list of the output parameter is given in Table 1-47 and Table 1-48. The output of the hybrid data only starts if a GNSS receiver is detected (by receiving the GNSS status Label 273) and the allocated time mark signal is available. For LCR-100 with P/N 145130-3000 also valid GNSS lever arm data hast to be stored to enable hybrid data output. Once the hybrid output data has been started, it continuous during the complete power-on cycle. Hybrid navigation is performed in normal operation modes (e.g. navigation mode and attitude mode). The calculation of the hybrid navigation data is initialized with valid attitude and heading after completion of the alignment and if valid GNSS data with allocated time mark are available. If the heading alignment was performed successfully in IRS heading alignment mode the hybrid navigation data is set valid. In order to achieve the full specified hybrid performance after AHRS alignment mode or after a re-initialization of the hybrid calculation a GNSS moving alignment is performed. The GNSS moving alignment time depends on the flight dynamic. Under typical flight dynamic the duration is in a range of 10 to 30 seconds. NOTE The following sentence is valid for all LCR-100 versions up to and including MOD Status 22, except P/N 145130-1002. If the heading alignment was performed in AHRS alignment mode the hybrid navigation data is set valid after successful heading verification by the GNSS moving alignment. --- End of note
DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2020 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

NOTE The following sentence is valid for all LCR-100 versions with MOD Status 23, except P/N 145130-1002. During the hybrid moving alignment the system sets the hybrid output data hybrid position and hybrid velocities valid except for hybrid heading. --- End of note NOTE The following sentence is only valid for LCR-100 P/N 145130-1002. If the heading alignment was performed in AHRS alignment mode the hybrid navigation data is set valid directly after the AHRS alignment. --- End of note After loss of valid horizontal GNSS data or loss of the allocated time mark the system computes the horizontal hybrid navigation data free inertial and outputs valid hybrid data. The related hybrid data is set invalid if the estimated hybrid accuracies exceed one of the following criteria: velocity > 1 m/s, position > 66 m heading > 5 degree or if the elapsed time without valid GNSS data exceeds 600 sec. (Only P/N 145130-1002.) If the vertical GNSS data are not available the vertical hybrid data is augmented by the pressure altitude input and added pressure altitude offset. If both vertical GNSS data and pressure altitude data are not available the vertical hybrid data is set invalid. If the divergence between the GNSS solution and the hybrid solution exceeds certain limits the hybrid navigation data is set invalid and a new initialization followed by a moving alignment of the hybrid navigation is performed. A new initialization can occur after alignment in AHRS alignment mode with large heading errors (e.g. corrupted flux valve data or wrong heading input in DG mode). In attitude mode a moving alignment will be necessary. The time of invalid hybrid data increases accordingly. The system performs plausibility checks to avoid augmentation with wrong GNSS data. After 30 seconds of continuously failed plausibility check the system re-initializes the hybrid platform. Long term error The system estimates long term errors of the inertial instruments by using GNSS data. For the long term sensor error estimation feature, the complete GNSS data-set is required (refer to Table 1-31). If the GNSS data of the vertical channel are missing, the performance of the long term error estimation is reduced. The currently estimated inertial instrument errors are
DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2021 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

used to improve the hybrid navigation performance (hybrid platform). Based on currently estimated sensor errors long term errors are derived and stored. Before storing the long term error compensation data, a plausibility test of the long term errors is performed. If the plausibility test fails the compensation data is not updated. The long term compensation data are limited to a value that does not affect the safety criteria of the attitude output. The stored long term error compensation data is used to improve the inertial navigation performance. The GNSS and hybrid data have no other influence to the inertial platform than initialization of the inertial position and the long term error scale factor compensation. The system calculates and outputs the Figure of Merit (FOM) of the hybrid position data as a 1 σ value - in case of P/N 145130-3000 as a 95% value. It calculates the hybrid reference data which are referenced to true north without latitude limitations. 5.4.2 AHRS Operation Modes

The AHRS operation modes are the normal operational modes of the Standard-AHRS LCR100 systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-6xxx and -7xxx) (refer to Figure 2-6). For LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N145130-1xxx, -2xxx and -3000) the AHRS mode is one of two possible modes. This systems operate as AHRS (without gyrocompassing) when attitude mode is selected (refer to Figure 2-5) or after startup in air. The attitude mode is the reversionary mode of this system.

5.4.2.1

Normal Attitude Mode

In normal attitude mode the system determines the attitude by a Schuler loop inertial platform mechanization using true airspeed augmentation. The normal attitude mode will be activated as long as the aircraft is determined to be in air and valid true airspeed (refer to section 2, paragraph 5.9.1) information is available or if the aircraft is determined to be on ground after power on. If the normal attitude mode conditions disappear in air, the system switches to basic attitude mode after a maximum of 5 minutes. If the normal attitude mode is activated at landing, it will remain active on ground. 5.4.2.2 Basic Attitude Mode In basic attitude mode the system determines the attitude autonomously without external augmentation by using the direct gravity coupling method. The basic attitude mode will be activated 30 s after take off if valid TAS is not available. If the conditions for operating in normal attitude mode are met (TAS valid, refer to section 2, paragraph 5.9.1), the system switches to the normal attitude mode after a maximum of 5 seconds. If the basic attitude mode is activated at landing, it will remain activate on ground.
DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2022 July 2011

The platform heading is augmented by a Magnetic Sensor Unit. In order to remove a slaving error (difference between the magnetic sensor input and the platform heading) the system sets the magnetic heading to the MSU heading input if one of the slew discretes is set and the MSU heading input is considered as valid at this time. When entering the MAG mode manually. The magnetic heading value can also be set to the current MSU value by switching from MAG mode to DG mode and back to MAG mode via ARINC 429 command or by the DG/MAG mode select discrete.5 deg/s. Not applicable to LCR-100 P/N 145130-1001 and LCR-100 Standard AHRS systems (P/N145130-6xxx and 7xxx) The slaved mode (MAG) is manually selectable. paragraph 5.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5.4 Directional Gyro Mode (DG) The DG Mode is manually selectable. If the DG mode is entered during operation (e. To avoid autopilot cutoffs the slaving rate during the fast realignment does not exceed 0.2) and the magnetic heading set command (refer to section 2. the magnetic heading is initiated with the value of the MSU heading input (provided that the MSU heading is considered as valid).2.g. MAG/DG transition or NAV/DG transition) or after a short power interrupt the system takes over the last valid magnetic heading and set the magnetic heading output valid.7. The platform heading is calculated without any augmentation and without vertical transport rate compensation. paragraph 5. If the MSU heading input is not valid (e. If no MSU is detected at power on. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2023 July 2011 .7. The system accepts magnetic heading slew commands (refer to section 2. 5.4. In DG Mode the system provides platform heading on magnetic heading output.2.3 Slaved Heading Mode (MAG) If no MSU is detected at power on the system disables the MAG mode.g. Not applicable to LCR-100 P/N 145130-1001 and LCR-100 Standard AHRS systems (P/N145130-6xxx and -7xxx).1). due to maneuvers or MSU errors or invalid or missing MSU signal) when entering the MAG mode.4. the system operates in DG mode independent on the DG/MAG mode discrete. the magnetic heading is set invalid as long as the MSU heading input is considered as valid. The impact of magnetic disturbances at landing sites after an in air to on ground transition is minimized.

providing outputs of aircraft attitude. To achieve the best accuracy of the WMM model the use of the current date is recommended for the calculation of the magnetic variation.7. the system uses the stored default date.1) An attitude mode command terminates the navigation mode. In navigation mode the system performs unaided Schuler .4. NOTE During the NAV/DG operation the normal navigation mode is calculated in the background. paragraph 5.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5.3 NOTE IRS Operation Modes This paragraph with its sub-paragraphs 5. The default date is the center date of the time span of the used WMM model.if the FMS is not available . true and magnetic heading. If available.2) or the magnetic heading set command (section 2.4.7.2 and 5.3. body rates and accelerations.1. paragraph 5. The platform heading is calculated without any augmentation and without vertical transport rate compensation. In navigation mode on ground the system accepts position initialization commands (see section 2.4. -2xxx and -3000).2) the system provides platform heading on magnetic heading output. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2024 July 2011 . After switching back to NAV/MAG mode the true heading is available again with transport rate compensation.from the GNSS input in case of indicating full operation (Note: GPS input is used from and including MOD-Status 20).4.tuned inertial navigation. paragraph 5.4. para.7. After selection of DG Mode the platform heading is initialized with the current true heading. the system uses an external input date for the calculation of the magnetic variation either from the FMS input or .3. The platform heading is adjustable by slew input discretes (see section 2.1 Navigation Mode The navigation mode will be entered after successful completion of a gyrocompassing or stored heading alignment. velocity vectors and present position. The system algebraically adds computed magnetic variation from the current WWM earth magnetic field model to true heading and true track to produce magnetic heading and magnetic track angle.3 is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. 5. If no date from external is available.7.3. 5.1) If DG Mode is selected by the DG/MAG Mode selection command (see section 2.3. 5.

2 Attitude Mode The attitude mode is the reversionary mode if navigation mode is not possible.3.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5.4. The attitude mode is not a self-contained mode. paragraph 5. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2025 July 2011 .7. paragraph 5.2.3.3.3. The attitude mode is terminated only by system power off or if the gyrocompass command is received when the aircraft is determined to be on ground and the attitude mode command is not set. Once the attitude mode is entered. the heading will be aligned as defined in section 2. It provides a rapid attitude and heading restart when the system loses the navigation mode by a temporary power loss or BIT detects excessive errors. the system remains in attitude mode independent of the attitude mode command. In attitude mode the inertial true heading information (Label 314) and all IRS data are set invalid. In this mode the system operates in the AHRS modes defined in section 2. paragraph 5. If the system enters the ATT/MAG mode.4.4. On ground the attitude mode (ATT) can only be entered manually by the attitude mode command. If the system enters the ATT/DG mode. paragraph 5. The attitude alignment is performed as defined in section 2.4.3. The attitude mode will be entered if the system is determined to be in air at startup or if the system receives the attitude mode command (refer to section 2. paragraph 5. the heading will be aligned as defined in section 2.1.2).2.

paragraph 5.3. In realignment mode the system performs a new heading estimation gyrocompassing as specified in section 2. paragraph 4.7.4. The remaining time until the first update of the heading is estimated and indicated in Label 305 (ARINC Label 305.2).Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5. If excessive motion (definition: refer to Table 2-16) is detected.1).1 in the background. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2026 July 2011 . During the first realignment after a successful gyrocompassing alignment the heading estimation is continued and the heading output is updated by the estimated heading.5.3 Realignment Mode The realignment mode will be initiated automatically if: the system is in navigation mode. The realignment mode is indicated in the ARINC 429 discrete word 270 (refer to Table 1-53). In realignment mode the system accepts position initialization commands (refer to section 2. In realignment mode the system zeros residual velocity errors accumulated in the previous operation and re-level pitch and roll. the aircraft is on ground and no motion is detected. During the realignment all inertial output data remain valid. refer to section 1. If the alignment completion criteria are fulfilled the heading output is updated with the new estimated heading. After the first heading update the heading estimation continues and the heading is further updated by the estimated heading.3.3. paragraph 5. the system switches back to the navigation mode.

Please press the mode button longer than 2 seconds! The MSU calibration mode is indicated by a continuous illuminating of the LED at the front plate of the system. In MSU calibration mode the system determines the coefficients used for compensation of single and dual cycle MSU errors. the calibration coefficients for single and dual cycle errors are calculated and stored in the IDM.5.5 NOTE MSU Calibration Mode This paragraph incl. If the LED flashes. (For further information about MSU Calibration: refer to section 1. paragraph 7.3) or by the mode button.1.1. the calibration coefficients are not stored in the IDM. The system leaves the MSU calibration mode if the MSU calibration discrete is switched from enabled to disabled.2 is only applicable with installed MSU! 5. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2027 July 2011 .3) is set to in air condition. The system transits from MSU calibration mode to normal operation if the ground/air discrete (refer to section 1.2.g. The attitude warn and heading warn flags are set to invalid condition. provided that: the alignment is completed the aircraft is determined to be on ground (ground/air discrete is set for aircraft on ground) a MSU is detected at power on no motion is detected.5.5.2.2. During the execution of the Compass Swing Procedure heading data are collected (Compass Swing Procedure: refer to section 1.3). If the MSU calibration mode has been entered by the mode button (MSU calibration discrete disabled). Data collecting is complete after turning through 315 deg (7 steps of 45 deg).5. paragraph 4.1. the system automatically leaves the MSU calibration mode 10 s after indication of the residual heading error or if the mode button has been activated again (pressed longer than 2 s). The heading output outputs uncompensated MSU input data until the aircraft is moved. After successful MSU calibration the heading warn flag is set valid. this indicates a fault and it is not possible to enter MSU calibration mode.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5. During the MSU Calibration Mode the system indicates DG mode operation on the related output (e.1 Compass Swing The system is able to perform a MSU calibration by a compass swing of the aircraft without a special maintenance tool. Bit 14 in Label 270). If the MSU calibration was not successful or terminated prematurely. After collecting the complete data.1and 5. paragraph 4.) The calibration mode will be activated by the MSU calibration discrete (refer to section 1. paragraph 4. The former coefficients are available again after the MSU calibration mode has been left. The MSU calibration algorithm is able to compensate MSU errors (sum of single and dual cycle errors) of up to 12 degrees. para.

3.3°/s accordingly. If the index error compensation is performed by the Slew Left / Slew Right commands (refer to section 2.7.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5. paragraph 5.7. paragraph 5. In order to enable a fast alignment after short power interrupts (refer to section 2. if the DG-Mode command is received while the system is in MSU Calibration Mode. attitude. The index error compensation is limited to a maximum of plus/minus 5°. By switching from DG to MAG mode.2 Index Error Compensation After the Compass Swing. index error compensation is recommended. body accelerations.6 Power Down The Power Down will be initiated automatically as soon as the system input power drops below the value specified in section 1. the error compensation will be incremented in 0.2).1° steps with a rate of 0. the index error compensation data are stored. the new index error compensation value will be rejected.5. body rates. command Label 275. paragraph 5. Air/Ground status. If there is no DG to MAG mode transition before leaving the MSU calibration mode.2) or by the Set Magnetic Heading Command (ARINC 429 Label 043).5. 5. position.6) or the stored heading alignment the system stores the last valid heading (true and magnetic). and the motion status in a non volatile memory during power down. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2028 July 2011 . paragraph 1. The system is able to program MSU index error compensation data manually via the Slew Left / Slew Right commands (refer to section 2.

4).7.1. the priority is as defined in Table 2-4 starting with the highest priority 1. paragraph 4. the related discrete input is disabled.3. Position Initialization is only accepted on ground. the commands defined in this paragraph are accepted either via discrete input or via ARINC 429 input Label 275 on data bus No.1. 5 and 6. The system accepts the initialization commands if two successive identical entries are received within 3 seconds. The input data bus No. paragraph 4.3.3. As long as an ARINC 429 command is enabled.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5.4) or GNSS position information received via ARINC 429 Input Bus No. For the position initialization the system accepts: manual position commands via ARINC 429 Input Bus No.1. With active Index Error Compensation (refer to section 2. Magnetic Heading Initialization In DG mode the system accepts a manual heading set command by the ARINC 429 command Label 043 (refer to Table 1-40) on ARINC 429 Input Data Bus No.3. 3 or 4 (refer to section 1.4).7 5. 5 has the higher priority. 5. Priority Input channel 1 5 (FMS/CCU1) 2 6 (FMS/CCU2) 3 1 (DADS1) 4 3 (GNSS1) 5 4 (GNSS2) Table 2-4 Position Initialization Priority GNSS position is only used as initialization position if no manual position has been entered since power on or since the last air to ground transition. paragraph 4. The ARINC 429 input commands are enabled by command enable bits in the command discrete word Label 275 (refer to section 1. 5 and 6 (refer to section 1.1 System Input Commands Initialization Commands To enter the initialization commands. paragraph 5.3). DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2029 July 2011 .2 Discrete / ARINC 429 Commands If not stated otherwise. If position information is received on several input channels. Position Initialization / Update This command is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 1451301xxx.1.7. the heading set command will be used to compensate the MSU Index error. 1. 5 or 6 (refer to section 1. -2xxx and -3000). paragraph 4.5). more than one entry is necessary.

for LCR-100 system with P/N 145130-1001 it is independent of the availability of the MSU. The system transits from self test data output to normal operational data output within one second.3. paragraph 5.4) depending on the status of the DG/MAG mode selection command (discrete or ARINC 429).3 and 5. the command will be accepted if the stored heading alignment discrete is set for at least 2 seconds (refer to section 1. the system accepts manual heading slew left and slew right commands. NOTE slew left = slew right = magnetic heading value decreasing magnetic heading value increasing The slew rate will be 2 deg/s for the first 3 seconds and 8 deg/s after 3 seconds continuous slewing.4. paragraph 5. paragraph 5. Stored Heading Alignment Command This command is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 1451301xxx. If the selftest data output is active. -2xxx and -3000).1. the system outputs defined values on its digital and analog data outputs as well as discrete and validity settings (refer to section 1.5. paragraph 5.2.2.1).Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Selftest Data Output Command The selftest data output will be activated if the selftest data output command is received (discrete or ARINC 429) and the aircraft is determined to be on ground (e.3). -2xxx and -3000) and it is only accepted if the aircraft is determined to be on ground.1. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2030 July 2011 . In navigation mode the system determines the magnetic heading depending on the status of the DG/MAG mode selection command (discrete or ARINC 429) as defined in section 2. if the selftest data output command is disabled or the ground/air discrete is set to in air condition. Magnetic Heading Slew This command is available as discrete input only.g. ground/air discrete).2. The system enters the stored heading alignment mode (refer to section 2. paragraph 4. If DG mode is selected.4. Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 1451301xxx. In AHRS operation this command is applicable only if a MSU is available. DG/MAG Mode Selection During AHRS operation the system operates either in MAG or DG mode (refer to section 2.2) if the stored heading alignment command is received (discrete or ARINC 429). If the discrete input is activated.4.3.

1.3. The system enters the attitude mode (refer to section 2. -2xxx and -3000).Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Gyrocompass Command This command is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 1451301xxx.4. paragraph 4. Re-Initialization of Hybrid Kalman Filter This command is available at P/N 145130-3000 only. 5.1.3) to 0.2.5. The re-initialization starts a realignment of the hybrid platform. Attitude Mode Command This command is only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 1451301xxx. All hybrid output labels except 274 are set to NCD until realignment is completed. If the Re-Initialization of Hybrid Kalman Filter bit (Label 275 bit 28) is selected the system reinitializes the hybrid Kalman Filter (ARINC 429).3 Normal Acceleration Test Enable When the Normal Acceleration Test Enable Discrete (refer to section 1. If the discrete input is activated. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2031 July 2011 . the command will be accepted if the attitude mode discrete is set for at least 2 seconds (refer to section 1. If the discrete input is activated the command will be accepted if the gyrocompass mode select discrete is set for at least 2 seconds.0 g) independent of the Air/Ground status.3). paragraph 5.3) is set the system sets the Normal Acceleration DC Output (refer to section 1.4. paragraph 5.1) if the gyrocompass command is received (discrete or ARINC 429). or forced or no input (BASIC Mode) according to Table 1-42 (discrete or ARINC 429). DADS 1/2 Select Command The system accepts the DADS 1 or 2 input either automatically.2.7. Hybrid GNSS Augmentation If the Hybrid GNSS augmentation bit (Label 275 bit 27) is set the system disables the augmentation by GNSS (ARINC 429). paragraph 4.2. paragraph 4. -2xxx and -3000) and it is only accepted if the aircraft is determined to be on ground. The system enters the gyrocompassing mode (refer to section 2. The self test data command on ground supersedes the Normal Acceleration Test output.2) if the attitude mode command is received (discrete or ARINC 429).0 VDC (= 0.3.

paragraph 3. ground/air discrete).1. and warn discretes) are flagged invalid all the time. Further maintenance test mode capabilities and functions are described in section 3.2.g.3.3) is set and the aircraft is determined to be on ground (e.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5.g. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2032 July 2011 . the system is not able to switch to any other mode except the Power Down mode.8 Maintenance Test Mode The maintenance test mode will be entered at power up when the test mode discrete (refer to section 1. The system has to be cycled through the off-state to return to normal operation. the test and maintenance interface is activated. In maintenance test mode BIT-History can be read out. paragraph 4. It is recommended to use the Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH Level 1 Maintenance Set. In maintenance test mode. Once in maintenance test mode. ARINC 429. In maintenance test mode all data on the operational output (e.

3. If no value is programmed to the IDM the default value is 900 ms. If the input rate of the GNSS data is higher than the time mark frequency (1Hz) only the latest data set isused which is received before the "GNSS maximum delay time" is elapsed (Only applicable to P/N 145130-1002) The parameter "GNSS maximum delay time" is stored in the IDM.2 Parameter will be set valid again after the step falls below the limit Difference of input checks will be performed only if two Digital Air Data systems are connected and both deliver valid data. the system uses the GNSS data only if the RAIM has no failure detected.9.9 5.1 Augmentation Validity Digital Air Data System (DADS) If the system is supplied with DADS data. paragraph 4. these data will be set valid under the following conditions: Parity and SSM (1) True Airspeed (TAS): Pressure Altitude valid valid Input range 50 .. If the horizontal integrity limit is available by the GNSS receiver the system uses the GNSS data only if the horizontal integrity limit is better than 2 nm. 65.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5. For variants with manual DADS selection function the check will only be performed if the automatic DADS selection is active. 700 kts -1.617 ft Step change (2) < 34 kts < 460 ft Difference of input (3) < 12 kts < 320 ft Table 2-5 1) 2) 3) Conditions for DADS data to be set valid applicable for ARINC 429 data.9.1. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2033 July 2011 .500 .. If the input rate of the GNSS data is higher than the time mark frequency (1Hz) the first data set after receiving the time mark signal is used (Not applicable to P/N 145130-1002). Its limits are: 100 to 900 ms. If a RAIM signal is available. refer to section 1. 5.2 Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) If the system is supplied with GNSS data these data will be set valid if an appropriate time mark signal on the allocated time mark input is available.

The following defined accuracies are valid for fault free augmentation input data. 6.5 deg (max) 0.1 General Definitions Static Condition (Straight and level flight) For some parameter the performance is differentiated between static and dynamic conditions: Parameter Acceleration Rates Pitch / Roll Heading Change Table 2-6 6. The specified accuracy for the Standard AHRS LCR-100 system (P/N 145130-6xxx and -7xxx) does not depend on the Mounting Tray used.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 6 System Performance NOTE All technical data concerning accuracy of LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS mentioned in this manual refer to an original LCR-100 type Mounting Tray (P/N 145137-0100 or 145138-0100).1 deg (max) 0.2 deg (95%) AHRS Operation (Attitude Mode) Basic Attitude Mode Normal Attitude Mode 0. -2xxx and -3000).0°/s (magnitude of vector) ≥ 15° (in both directions) continuous turns Static / Dynamic Conditions Attitude Accuracy IRS Operation (Navigation Mode) 0.5 deg (95%) Table 2-7 Attitude Accuracy DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2034 July 2011 .3 deg (95%) 1.0 deg (95%) 0. With an LCR-92/93 type Mounting Tray (standard or ruggedized version) Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH does not guaranty to achieve the specified accuracy for the Gyrocompass AHRS (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. ruggedized: P/N 144200-0000 or 144201-0000) can also be used for LCR-100 (concerning the outlines).2 g (magnitude of vector) < 5.3 deg (95%) 0. The LCR-92/93 Mounting Tray (standard: P/N 124260-0000 or 140691-0000.0°/s (magnitude of vector) < 15° (in both directions) no continuous turns Dynamic Condition ≥ 0.5 deg (max) 0.2 g (magnitude of vector) ≥ 5.2 Pitch/Roll Static Dynamic Static Condition < 0.

5 deg 1.25 deg latitude P/N 145130-1002 Table 2-8 1) 2) 3) Heading Accuracy In MAG mode the heading accuracy is related to the local magnetic field. An additional heading error may occur due to gyro scale factor error (1000 ppm 95%).70 deg latitude 70 . 4) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2035 July 2011 . -2xxx.78.0 deg/h + 1000 ppm IRS Operation (Navigation Mode) all values 95% P/N 145130-1xxx.25 deg latitude 1.2 deg 1.70 deg latitude 70 .5 deg 2. The error of the model varies with different locations and can increase up to 2 deg.0 deg 2.78. To minimize the error the input of the current date to the system is recommended.75 deg latitude 75 .75 deg latitude 75 . Otherwise the drift may increase up to 15 deg/h. The used model is the NOAA world magnetic field model. -3000 (except 145130-1002) True Heading Gyrocompassing accuracy (3) 1.25 deg latitude < 60 deg latitude 60 .5 deg 3.4 deg Additional Heading error during a 3 hour flight 1.7 deg 3.3 Parameter Heading Accuracy AHRS Operation (Attitude Mode) all values 95% MAG Mode (1) DG Mode (2) Magnetic Heading Static Conditions Dynamic Conditions Parameter 1.0 deg 1.70 deg latitude 70 .2 deg 3.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 6. This additional error depends on the flight maneuvers The long term scale factor error can be bounded to 200 ppm (95%) by GNSS augmentation. The model cannot account for local anomalies.3 deg 4.25 deg latitude < 60 deg latitude 60 .0 deg/h 5.78.75 deg latitude 75 . The GNSS augmentation requires the data defined in of a GNSS receiver on one of the GNSS ARINC 429 input data buses and the time mark signal of this receiver on the associated time mark input.70 deg latitude 70 .0 deg 1.8 deg 2. The DG mode accuracies are given if latitude estimation is available.6 deg < 60 deg latitude 60 .75 deg latitude 75 .0 deg 2. The errors are described in detail in the NOAA Technical Report NESDIS/NGDC.78. The latitude will be estimated at alignment on ground or after alignment in air during straight and level flight if a MSU is available.0 deg 5.8 deg 2. The lever arm of the GNSS antenna to the AHRU should be entered in the IDM to maximize the error compensation capability.0 deg Magnetic Heading True heading error plus world magnetic field model error (4) < 60 deg latitude 60 .8 deg 2.

5 Parameter Inertial Altitude Angular Rates and Acceleration Accuracy Vertical Navigation Accuracy IRS Operation (Navigation Mode) and AHRS Operation (Attitude Mode) all values 95% 5 ft 30 ft/min Accuracy specified with constant altitude input and filter at steady state with no error assumed in air data input Inertial Vertical Speed Table 2-10 6. Parameter Position 12 nm/h 2 nm/15 minutes 24 kts 24 kts 10 % 2 deg 4 deg Accuracy specified for flight path angle <10 deg and for Ground Speed > 120 kts.6 Vertical Navigation Accuracy Inertial Navigation Accuracy Only applicable for LCR100-Gyrocompass Systems (P/N 145130-1xxx.4 Body Rates and Acceleration Accuracy The system is able to measure angular rates around the three main axes up to 600°/s.5 % 5 mg or 0.02 deg/s or 0. -2xxx and -3000). Roll. Parameter Body Rates (x. Accuracy specified for flight path angle between 10 and 20 deg and for Ground Speed > 120 kts. z) Euler Rates (Pitch.5 % 5 mg or 0. With extreme flight path angles and low ground speed the error can increase to any value Flight Path Acceleration Track Angle True 10 % 10 deg Accuracy specified for Ground speed > 120 kts DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2036 July 2011 IRS Operation (Navigation Mode) only all values 95% Position Drift Position Drift after entering Navigation Mode (P/N: 1451303000 only) Ground Speed N-S / E-W Velocities Along / Across Track horizontal Accelerations Flight Path Angle .5 % 10 % Whichever is greater Whichever is greater Whichever is greater Whichever is greater Table 2-9 6.02 deg/s or 0.5 % 0. Turn) Body Accelerations Vertical Acceleration Along/ Across Heading Acceleration IRS Operation (Navigation Mode) and AHRS Operation (Attitude Mode) all values 95% 0. y.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 6. and accelerations in the three main axes up to 10g.

In accordance to ARINC 743A-5 the GNSS receiver has to compute and to provide an estimate of position. -2xxx and -3000). In order to get best performance it is essential to know the exact point of time when the data was valid and to get instantaneous values to the greatest possible extent. All accuracies of GNSS dependent output data (hybrid data) are specified for static conditions under the following prerequisites: GNSS Receiver: Time Mark Pulse: GNSS PDOP: 2d-position (2dRMS) accuracy: GNSS velocity accuracy: Accuracy of programmed GNSS antenna lever arm: (Location of GNSS antenna with respect to center of inertial measurement): in accordance with ARINC 743/743A/743A-5 available in accordance with ARINC 743/743A/743A-5 < 3. The inertial navigation performance can only be guaranteed if a gyrocompassing with an accuracy of 1° has been performed (refer to Figure 2-7 and Table 2-16).25 deg/s 24 kts 20 deg 10 deg 30 ft/min (1) (1) Accuracy specified for wind speed > 24 kts Accuracy specified for Ground speed > 120 kts IRS Operation (Navigation Mode) only all values 95% Accuracy specified for Ground speed > 120 kts.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Parameter Track Angle MAG Track Angle Rate Wind Speed Wind Direction Drift Angle Potential Vertical Speed 10 deg 0. Accuracy depends on MagVar model Table 2-11 1) Inertial Navigation Accuracy No error assumed in DADS TAS input and bank angle <35 deg. S/A off 2kts (95%). both position and velocity must be referenced to a known point of time. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2037 July 2011 . 6. To ensure a proper synchronization between the GNSS input and the inertial data.1m To achieve the hybrid accuracies after dynamic flight conditions it is necessary to fly the aircraft straight and level (refer to paragraph 6.7 Hybrid Navigation Accuracy Only applicable for LCR-100 Gyrocompass systems (P/N 145130-1xxx. time and velocity that is coincident in time.0 30m.1) for 3 minutes. S/A off < 0. when the data set were valid.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Parameter Hybrid True Heading Hybrid Position IRS Operation (Navigation Mode) and AHRS Operation (Attitude Mode) all values 95% 0.5 deg GNSS accuracy 4 nm GNSS augmented (1) 1 hour after loss of GNNS augmentation Prerequisite: 30 minutes of GNSS augmentation including dynamic aircraft operation with a turn of 360° independent of the turn direction (The turn needs not to be performed in one maneuver) Static Dynamic Static Dynamic Static Dynamic Accuracy specified for Ground speed > 120 kts Whichever is grater Accuracy specified for Ground speed > 60 kts Accuracy specified for Ground speed > 60 kts, Accuracy depending on MagVar model (2) (2) Accuracy specified for wind speed > 10 kts Accuracy specified for Ground speed > 60 kts

Hybrid Ground Speed Hybrid N-S / E-W Velocities Hybrid Along / Across Heading Velocities Hybrid Flight Path Angle Hybrid Flight Path Acceleration Hybrid Track Angle True Hybrid Track Angle MAG Hybrid Track Angle Rate Hybrid Wind Speed Hybrid Wind Direction Hybrid Drift Angle Hybrid Vertical Velocity Hybrid Altitude Hybrid Potential Vertical Speed

0.5 kts 1.0 kts 0.5 kts 1.0 kts 0.5 kts 1.0 kts 0.5 deg 5 mg or 2 % 0.5 deg 3 deg 0.25 deg/s 5 kts 10 deg 1 deg 50 ft/min 80 ft 50 ft/min

Table 2-12
1) 2)

Hybrid Navigation Accuracy

Not valid for LCR-100 with P/N 145130-1002 No error assumed in DADS TAS input and bank angle <35 deg.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2038 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

6.8 NOTE

Hybrid Navigation after loss of GNSS augmentation (Coasting Operation)

This paragraph is only applicable for the LCR-100 with P/N 145130-3000. After loss of GNSS augmentation the AHRU provides the position drifts shown in Table 2-13 and Table 2-14. The coasting performance after 60 minutes GNSS of augmentation in straight and level flight profile according DO-316 Appendix R is shown in the table below. Position Drift after GNSS loss (Coasting Operation) Time 95% Table 2-13 0.1 nm 3 min 0.3 nm 6 min 0.5 nm 8 min 1 nm 12 min 2 nm 17 min 4 nm 27 min

Position drift after GNSS loss according DO-316

The following table shows the coasting performance after 30 minutes of GNSS augmentation including dynamic aircraft operation (taxi, curve flight,…) in order to estimate the deterministic inertial sensor errors. Position Drift after GNSS loss (Coasting Operation) Time 95% Table 2-14 0.1 nm 10 min 0.3 nm 17 min 0.5 nm 20 min 1 nm 28 min 2 nm 40 min 4 nm 60 min

Position drift after GNSS loss after dynamic operation

The available coasting performance during operation is indicated on the ARINC output Label 265 Predicted HFOM (Note: The HFOM is predicted for flight phases with low acceleration (e.g. landing approach)) This value represents the 95% of the hybrid navigation position error after 10 minutes if GNSS augmentation would be lost at this moment.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2039 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

7 7.1

Operating Limitations Angular Rates and Body Accelerations

The measurement range of the system is limited:
-

to ± 600 deg/s for angular rates and to ± 10 g for body accelerations.

If these limits are exceeded, the system may lose its reference and sets system warn annunciations. Recovery is only possible by system power off and on. 7.2 7.2.1 Latitude Limitations for Heading AHRS Operation

Due to the high inclination of the magnetic field in the vicinity of the magnetic poles, the horizontal magnetic field strength is drastically reduced and the magnetic heading sensing will become unreliable. The system checks the magnitude of the incoming signal. If a MSU is available and MAG mode is selected, the system operates in MAG mode independent on the horizontal magnetic field strength. If the MSU signal decreases to values where the specified accuracies cannot be guaranteed, the magnetic field strength status bit in ARINC 429 Label 271 (refer to Table 1-56) is set. Due to variations of the signal magnitude of the individual MSUs, the exact value of the horizontal field strength leading to a low field strength indication cannot be specified. In areas where the horizontal field strength is less than 10.000 nT (refer to the map in the corresponding pilot’s guide) or if low magnetic field strength is detected by the system, DG Mode operation (decoupling of the MSU) is recommended. The DG mode has to be selected manually by the pilot. If the DG mode is selected, the setting of the low field strength status is suppressed. If the system is operated at latitudes beyond ± 80°, the heading accuracy might be degraded, also in DG mode.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2040 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

7.2.2

IRS Operation in Navigation Mode

Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx, -2xxx and -3000). If the aircraft position is within the regions defined in Table 2-15, all data that are referenced to magnetic north are set to no computed data (NCD). The heading accuracies depending on latitude are defined in Table 2-8.
Region Southern Hemisphere Latitude > 82° > 59.5° > 82° > 70° Longitude E180° - W180° E118.5° - E160° 0° - 360° W80° - W135°

Northern Hemisphere

Table 2-15 7.3 7.3.1

Northern and Southern Magnetic Variation Cutouts

Limitations on Aerobatic Flights and Continuous Turns AHRS operation

During aerobatic flight profiles (continuous maneuvering without straight and level flight condition) the platform heading and, in Basic Attitude Mode also the platform attitude, are in free inertial operation influencing the system’s heading and possibly attitude accuracy due to the gyro drift. To maintain the specified system accuracy of the system in AHRS operation, it is necessary to fly the aircraft straight and level as defined in section 2, paragraph 6.1, in each case for a period of 60 seconds after a maximum of 20 minutes of aerobatic flight or continuous turns. 7.3.2 IRS operation in Navigation Mode

Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx, -2xxx and -3000). The specified system accuracies in the navigation mode (refer to section 2, paragraph 6) are applicable for standard applications and flight profiles. For applications with aerobatic flight profiles and continuous turns, a special investigation an evaluation of the flight profiles with their impact to the system accuracy has to be performed. 7.4 Velocity Limitation

The system is designed to meet all specified values in the subsonic velocity range. If the velocity limit is exceeded, the system accuracy may degrade.
DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2041 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

7.5

Limitations for Gyrocompassing and Free Inertial Navigation

Only applicable for Gyrocompass AHRS systems (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx, -2xxx and -3000).
Environmental Condition Random Vibration DO-160E Cat SB2; 0.74 grms DO-160E Cat SB2mod; 2.0 grms DO-160E Cat SC; 4.12 grms Temperature -40 °C - + 55 °C < -40 °C > +55 °C Temperature Variation < 2 C/min 2 C/min < dT < 5 C/min Gyrocompassing and Navigation Mode Full Performance: gyro compassing and navigation Navigation mode: AHRS operation accuracy (1) AHRS mode, AHRS operation accuracy Full Performance (Accuracy) AHRS operation accuracy (1) AHRS operation accuracy (1) Full Performance AHRS operation accuracy (1) Gyrocompassing Performance No gyrocompassing, only Attitude mode possible No gyrocompassing, only Attitude mode possible

Operational Condition In Flight Alignment On ship

Excessive Motion > 0.2 m/s; or position change > 1 m Gyrocompassing aborted

Table 2-16
1)

Limitations for Gyrocompassing and Navigation Mode

System is operating in navigation mode but has the accuracies as defined for AHRS operation in paragraph 6. The accuracy for inertial navigation data defined in Table 2-10 is not specified under these conditions.

7.6

Limitations for Vertical Navigation

The altitude range for the vertical navigation is limited from -1000 feet to +50000 feet according ARINC 706-4.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2042 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

8
SECT.
4 4.5.5 5 6 7

Environmental Specifications according RTCA DO160-E
SPECIFICATION
Temperature/Altitude In Flight Loss of Cooling Temperature Variation Humidity Shock

CAT.
A2, F2 B B E

DESCRIPTION
-55°C to +70°C, 55,000 feet Refer to Note (1) No special cooling required 5°C/min 0 to 95 %, 65°C to 38°C, 10 days Operational 6 g, 20 ms, 3 axes Crash (impulse) 20 g, 20 ms, 3 axes Crash (sustained) 20 g, 3 s, 3 axes 1.5 g 2.5 g; not certified with LCR-92/93 standard-trays P/N: 124260-0000 and 140691-0000 P/N: 145130-1xxx, -2xxx and -3000 1.48 grms 2.0 grms 0.0032 g2/Hz ,10 to 980 Hz 0.000085 g2/Hz @ 2000 Hz 4.1 grms ; certified for AHRS mode only P/N: 145130-6xxx and -7xxx 4.1 grms 5.8 grms; non operating not certified with LCR-92/93 standard trays P/N: 124260-0000 and 140691-0000

8

Standard Sinusoidal Vibration High Level Short Duration Sinusoidal Vibration Standard Random Vibration

SM HR

SB SB2 mod. SC SC RC1 UG E W X D F S Z Z A Z ZC KG GK YY, KK 21 22 23 24 25 26 Emission of RF energy Lightning induced transient suscep. Lightning Direct Effects Icing Electrostatic Discharge Fire, Flammability M A4J44 X X A C

Robust Random Vibration Helicopter: Sine on Random 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Explosion proofness Waterproofness Fluids susceptibility Sand and dust Fungus resistance Salt spray Magnetic effect Power input Voltage spike AF conducted susceptibility Induced signal susceptibility RF susceptibility

N/A

Notes with subject to Power Interrupts: Refer to section 2, Paragraph 9

P/N: 145130-1xxx, -2xxx and -3000 P/N: 145130-1xxx, -3000 in AHRS mode only, P/N: 145130-6xxx (2) P/N: 145130-1xxx, -2xxx and -3000 in AHRS mode only P/N: 145130-6xxx and -7xxx

N/A N/A Flammability

Table 2-17

Environmental Requirements according RTCA DO160-E
DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2043 July 2011

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH
INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100

Note (1): The LCR-100 can be operated for short time (up to 30 minutes) in the over temperature range up to +75 °C. The specified system accuracy is not guaranteed in the over temperature range. Important condition: After the unit was powered ON in the over temperature range the LCR-100 must not be switched off before the environmental temperature has reached the specified normal operating temperature range (-55°C - +70°C). It must be ensured that the temperature of the housing does not exceed +85°C otherwise system hardware may be damaged. Note (2): Additionally for digital system version (no synchro interface module, P/N: 145130-1xxx, -3000, -6xxx) the following HIRF conditions are fulfilled:
Frequency 100 - 110 MHz 110 - 140 MHz 140 - 700 MHz 700 - 900 MHz 900 MHz - 1 GHz 1 - 4 GHz 4 - 6 GHz 6 - 8 GHz 8 - 12 GHz 12 - 18 GHz Electric Field PM (V/m) 500 100 500 700 700 3000 3600 1500 2500 1200 Pulse Width 4 µs 4 µs 4 µs 4 µs 3 µs 1 µs 1 µs 1 µs 1 µs 1 µs Pulse Repetition Frequency 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz

Table 2-18

Peak levels for modulation according to Category K

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2044 July 2011

When the alignment is completed.3. the AHRU automatically switches on again. Mode is initiated by the Startup mode.2 and 5. In fast alignment. The fast alignment will be completed within 100 milliseconds.e. 9.0 second. with the exception of the accelerometer derived data.6). attitude and heading will be realigned with the propagated Euler angles based on the average aircraft motion. Power interruptions with a duration of less than 500 milliseconds are identified as Short power interrupts. This data is valid again within 1. During power interrupts of more than 50 milliseconds.3 Duration: Long Power Interrupt more than 500 ms System response: Normal turn-on sequence (refer to section 2.1 Power Interrupts General The AHRU operates during undervoltage conditions down to 15 VDC without any loss of performance. which may cause a fast realignment cycle (refer to section 2. the AHRU switches off.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 9 9. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2045 July 2011 . i.2 Duration: Short Power Interrupt between 50 and 500 ms Power interrupts with a duration of less than 50 milliseconds are buffered by the AHRU power supply and do not influence the AHRU performance. paragraph 5. Once the power returns and the input voltage increases above an 18 VDC threshold.3). 9. The AHRU shall not be operated within undervoltage conditions for longer periods. initiated with complete realignment. paragraph 5. the AHRS Operational Mode is activated. or if the input voltage drops below a threshold of 15 VDC.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 2 Page 2046 July 2011 .

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 SECTION 3 INITIAL INSTALLATION & TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G TITLE PAGE SECTION 3 July 2011 .

.

OEM or field service personnel. diagnostics for trouble shooting and to provide software updating. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3001 July 2011 . The Test Set supports the following functions for LCR-100: - Installation support to determine mounting misalignments Programming and verifying of installation data  Mounting Misalignments  GNSS antenna lever arms  Lever arms to A/C Center of Gravity  MSU calibration data  Fix corrupted IDMs Diagnostics and test  Data Monitoring  Configuration of test interface  Read BIT History  Clear BIT History (special function)  Read ETI - - A set of maintenance functions for trained personnel only.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1 NG LITEF L1MS Maintenance Set The L1MS is a tool to set AHRS configuration parameters. The L1MS HW consists of a test box and cables to provide all necessary connections to power the AHRS and establish a data transfer to and from the PC. to perform monitoring and storage of operational data. To operate the L1MS a Windows compatible PC is required including a standard USB and Ethernet interface. It can be used in the aircraft or on the bench by the customer.

-2xxx and -3000 (To determine Pitch. to de.0000-840 termine Pitch.2 IMI LCR-92: P/N 1414500000-840 IMI LCR-93 All LCR-100 or LCR-92/93 P/Ns P/N 142185(To determine Pitch & Roll Compensation data) LCR-100: P/N145130-1xxx. -2xxxx and -3000. Table 3-1 gives an overview of the several L1MS versions with references.1 & Figure 3-1 Para.1 ITEM LIST The primary component of the L1MS is a test-box which provides the operator with all the necessary connections to power the LCR-100 (or LCR-9x) and establish a data transfer and access the various maintenance modes. Figure 3-1 shows the L1MS Base version (P/N: 309946-0000). Roll & Heading compensation data) All LCR-100 or LCR-92/93 P/Ns (To determine Pitch & Roll Compensation data) Refer to Para. 1.3 Table 3-1 1) Overview L1MS Versions LCR-9x stands for the following P/Ns of AHRS: LCR-92: P/N: 124210-xxxx or 141450-xxx or 141852-xxxx.1. 1.1.1. P/N145130-1xxx.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1. where you can find detailed parts lists and connecting diagrams. 1. LCR-93: P/N: 142185-xxxx DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3002 July 2011 . Roll & Heading compensation data) all L1MS versions para. Test Box L1MS P/N: 309946-2000 Figure 3-1 L1MS Base Version Overview L1MS-Versions: L1MS Version L1MS Base Version 309946-0000 for all LCR-100 P/Ns L1MS Base Version with GC Tool Option 309946-0500 for: LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS L1MS Base Version with LCR-9x Tool Option 309946-0600 for: all LCR-100 P/Ns & LCR-9x (1) L1MS Base Version with GC Tool Option & LCR-9x Tool Option 309946-0700 for: LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS & LCR-9x (1) Commercial Parts To be used for All LCR-100 P/Ns (To determine Pitch & Roll Compensation data) All LCR-100 P/Ns (To determine Pitch & Roll Compensation data) LCR-100.

left) 309946-0000 (Case with L1MS Test Box.1 L1MS Base Version The L1MS Base Version is the basic component of all L1MS-Versions listed in Table 3-1. The L1MS Base Version can be used for all LCR-100 AHRS to determine Pitch & Roll Compensation data. Table 3-2 shows the Parts List of L1MS base Version.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1. Software and Cables: Details: refer to Parts List on the side) Table 3-2 Parts List L1MS Base Version DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3003 July 2011 . P/N L1MS Base Version Parts List of L1MS Base Version (refer also to Figure 3-1) 309946-5000 309946-2000 309946-3001 309946-3002 309946-3003 450910-8005-000 450910-9707-000 450911-1437-000 LCR-100 L1MS Software Disk LCR-100 L1MS Test Box LCR-100 L1MS Cable PW OUT (J1) LCR-100 L1MS Cable SIG (J6) LCR-100 L1MS Cable Power In Ethernet Patch Cable (2m) USB Cable (2m) Transport Case (refer to Figure 3-1. Figure 3-2and Figure 3-3 shows 2 possible variants of connecting LCR-100 and L1MS.1.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Figure 3-2 Connecting variant 1: LCR-100 UUT with L1MS Base Version DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3004 July 2011 .

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Figure 3-3 Connecting variant 2: LCR-100 UUT with L1MS Base Version DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3005 July 2011 .

NOTE The L1MS Base version (P/N 309946-0000) as described in para. -2xxx & 3000) to determine Pitch.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1.1 is included in L1MS Base Version with GC Tool Option! P/N L1MS Base Version Parts List with GC-Tool Option 309946-0000 309946-0500 309946-0010 L1MS Base version (parts list: refer to Table 3-2) L1MS GC Tool Option: (parts list: refer to Table 3-4) Table 3-3 Parts List L1MS Base Version with GC-Tool Option Parts List of L1MS GC-Tool Option (refer also to Figure 3-7) 310260-0000 309946-3010 309946-3011 309946-3012 309946-3016 Adapter Tray (refer to Figure 3-4) J1 Extension Cable for Power Interface (1) J6 Extension Cable and L1MS-Interface J5 Extension Cable for IDM J4 Extension Cable and ARINC-Interface P/N L1MS GC-Tool Option 309946-0010 Table 3-4 1) Parts List L1MS GC Tool Option J1 extension cable can be used to extend the cable 309946-3001.2 L1MS Base Version with GC Tool Option The L1MS Base Version is used for all LCR-100 AHRS to determine Pitch & Roll compensation data or . In the most cases 309946-3001 is long enough and the extension cable is not required. During determination of the heading compensation data (only possible with LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS P/N 145130-1xxx. Therefore the Adapter Tray is required. 2xxx and -3000) it is necessary to turn the AHRU 180 deg.using additional the GC Tool Option .1. 1.1. Roll and Heading compensation data. Figure 3-4 Adapter Tray LCR-100 DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3006 July 2011 .for LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS (P/N 145130-1xxx.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Figure 3-5 Connecting Variant 1: LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS with L1MS DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3007 July 2011 .

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Figure 3-6 Connecting Variant 2: LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS with L1MS DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3008 July 2011 .

pdf).0 Data Port 1 CD-ROM drive 10/1000 Ethernet Port available for Data Storage 1. 512 MB RAM. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3009 July 2011 . Software: Adobe Reader 1 unused USB 2.1.3 L1MS GC-Tool Option Commercial Parts 1 PC with the following requirements: - Operating System: Windows 2000 SP 4 or XP SP 2/3 or Windows Vista Pentium PC 1GHz.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Components of GC Tool Option Case with L1MS Base Version and GC Tool Option Figure 3-7 1.2 Applicable Documents for L1MS The User Manual (P/N: 309946-0000-840) for L1MS is included on the Software Disk that is part of the L1MS Base Version and can be found after installation of the L1MS Software in the L1MS installation folder (filename: manual. 20MB free for L1MS program.

The LCR-92/93 Mounting Tray (standard: P/N 124260-0000 or 140691-0000. NOTE Installation of the LCR-100 Mounting Tray for use with Gyrocompass AHRS: The mounting tray is to be installed and grounded according to the outline drawings (refer to Figure 1-12 and Figure 1-13) (use the four mandatory fixing holes and the grounding screw). If the Tray is not mounted as required in the outline drawing Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH does not guarantee the specified accuracy for the Gyrocompass AHRS will be achieved. Installation of the LCR-100 Mounting Tray for use with Standard AHRS: For a standard AHRS you have to install the Mounting Tray at 4 fixing holes. The outline drawings of the mounting trays with and without fan are shown in Figure 1-12 through Figure 1-17.2. For mounting tolerances and Tray Alignment Procedure refer to paragraph 2. Figure 3-8 shows the principle mounting of the AHRU on the Mounting Tray. must be aligned as accurately as possible/necessary to the aircraft axes. the AHRU Mounting Tray. Figure 1-2 shows the four possible mounting positions of the AHRU that are defined by the Mounting Position Discretes (refer to Table 1-14). The specified accuracy for the Standard AHRS LCR-100 system (P/N 1451306xxx and -7xxx) does not depend on the Mounting Tray used. it is recommended to use at least two of the four fixing holes at the front of the Tray and two of the four fixing holes at the rear of the Tray. Therefore. -2xxx and -3xxx) will be achieved.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2 2. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3010 July 2011 . roll and azimuth axes of the aircraft is fundamental for the operation of the AHRS. With an LCR-92/93 type Mounting Tray (standard or ruggedized version) Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH does not guarantee the specified accuracy for the Gyrocompass AHRS (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx. ruggedized: P/N 144200-0000 or 144201-0000) can also be used for LCR-100 (concerning the outlines). Operation in Navigation Mode is only certified for these trays. The orthogonal alignment of the Mounting Tray with respect to the pitch. for hard-mount as well as palletized installation. However. too.1 AHRU Alignment Requirements Installation of Mounting Tray NOTE All technical data concerning accuracy of LCR-100 Gyrocompass AHRS mentioned in this manual refer to an original LCR-100 type Mounting Tray (P/N 145137-0100 or 145138-0100). The six other holes can additionally be used.

which has to be avoided. DIN EN ISO 4762 hexagon socket or DIN EN ISO 7045 pan head) in combination with DIN 433 washers for mounting the tray onto a base. which are of frequent use in helicopters.2 ±0. Increasing stiffness of the mounting base. in order to avoid large deflections and bending during vibration.1 Mounting and Base-Plate Recommendations The typical mounting of avionics equipment on shelves of a rack is usually adequate for electronic boxes. this has to be of major concern: to avoid angular movement of the tray and the system the mounting base has to be stiffened by means of additional stiffeners running in both horizontal directions (e.5 ± 1. The AHRU is generally located in the aircraft's equipment bay electronics rack.15 Nm respectively 19. The holes are large enough to allow for the heading alignment (Tray alignment procedure: refer to paragraph 2. The main consideration in the installation of any inertial System is to avoid angular vibration at the system mounting interface. riveted to the base plate).2). they combine the three major advantages: - Lightweight Increased stiffness Intrinsic damping Therefore those honeycomb materials should be the first choice for a mounting base plate. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3011 July 2011 . U-shaped sheet metal rods. 2. Torque: 2. Experience shows that honeycomb composite materials. The LCR-100 Mounting Trays as well as the LCR-92/93 ruggedized Mounting Trays have to be grounded using a Grounding Screw (8-32 screw.2 Mounting Screws The tray is designed for using metric M4-screws (e.1.5 in-lbs).g.2 ± 0. Metal shelves equipped without any stiffening devices are too weak for mounting inertial systems. Choice of LCR location within the aircraft: The location for mounting the LCR-100 should be chosen in general with respect to minimize the vibration input to the system. have the best considerable vibration response. Examples of means for avoidance or reduction of angular vibration are: Minimization of outline of the mounting base: no large plates or sheets should be used as base for the tray.g.15 Nm respectively 19. according to ANSI/ASME standard) with tooth washer. 8 washers is permissible (torque for both screw types 2. Alternatively the use of 8-32 screws (according to ANSI/ASME standard) together with NAS620 No.5 ± 1.5 in-lbs. but is not satisfactory for motion sensing systems like the LCR-100.1.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2. Mounting location of tray in the center of the supporting structure: any offset of the mounting location from the center of a vibrating structure transforms the longitudinal deflection into an angular movement.

The IDM is mechanically connected with the Tray.2. As long as the Tray is mounted to the A/C the compensation values are valid for any AHRU that is mounted into this Tray.2 degrees) in azimuth. Roll and Yaw (Heading): refer to paragraph: 2. it is necessary that the AHRU (Tray) is installed or compensated to a remaining tolerance of at least ± 12 arcminutes (± 0. P/N 145130-1xxx.2 Tray mounting and alignment steps (1) Mechanical Mounting and Alignment Mechanical installation according paragraph: 2.2. pitch and roll with reference to the principal aircraft axes.1.1 (Applicable only for LCR-100 Gyrocompass systems. The compensation values are limited to ±3 deg.2.2.2.2 2.1 (2) Determination of the Tray Misalignment Measurement of Tray Misalignment (using appropriate measurement equipment) or Determination of Tray Misalignment using L1MS Determination of Tray Misalignment in Pitch.3.1 Mounting Tolerance and Tray Alignment Required accuracy for Tray Alignment In order to ensure sufficient accuracy in the aircraft attitude and other related outputs.3. 2. -2xxx and -3000) or Determination of Tray Misalignment in Pitch and Roll: refer to paragraph 2.4 (Applicable for all LCR-100 Systems) (3) Compensation of Tray Misalignment Mechanical adjustment by turning and shimming the tray to achieve the required accuracy as stated in paragraph 2. Storing the determined compensation values into the IDM using L1MS (1) 1) The compensation values are aircraft specific.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3012 July 2011 .

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Figure 3-8 AHRU principle mounting on the Mounting Tray DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3013 July 2011 .

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3014 July 2011 .3. This procedure performs both: determination and storage of the compensation data in one working step. This is included on the Software Disk that is part of the L1MS Base Version and can be found after installation of the L1MS Software in the L1MS installation folder (filename: manual. Figure 3-5. section 3 gives an overview over the several L1MS types and shows how to wire the test cables. Roll and Yaw (Heading) This paragraph is only applicable for LCR-100 Gyrocompass systems (P/N 145130-1xxx.1 Automatic Tray Alignment Procedure The L1MS allows a fully automatic system alignment for all LCR-AHRS. Wiring of AHRU.and Heading-misalignment (applicable for LCR-100 Gyrocompass systems (P/N: 145130-1xxx.1.3.1 Manual Tray Alignment Procedure Tray Alignment procedure to determine Tray Misalignment Compensation Values in Pitch. except for P/N 145130-1002 (With this System you can only perform the procedure described in paragraph 2.2.2) Paragraph 2. L1MS and A/C -cables: refer to section 3. NOTE For multiple LCR-100 installations in one aircraft this procedure is to be repeated accordingly.3. 2. Paragraph 1.2 2.4). -2xxx and -3000)) Both procedures mentioned above can be either performed by: Automatic Tray Alignment Procedure (refer to paragraph 2.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2.3. The Automatic Alignment procedure is described in the L1MS User Manual (P/N: 3099460000-840).3.5 the determination of the Lever Arms from the AHRU to the A/C Center of Gravity. The required equipment L1MS Base Version with GC Tool Option is listed in Section 3.1) Or: - Manual Tray Alignment Procedure (refer to paragraph 2.2. -2xxx and -3000).and Pitch-misalignment (applicable for all LCR P/Ns) Determination of correction values for Roll-. 2.pdf).3.2.4 describes how to determine the GNSS Lever Arms from the AHRU to the GNSS antennas and in paragraph 2. Pitch. paragraph 1.3 Determination and Compensation of Tray Misalignment by means of the LCR-100 and the L1MS Depending on the LCR-100 P/N there are two procedures available to determine the misalignment compensation values: Determination of correction values for the Roll.

Switch-on the AHRU and monitor the Pitch. Figure 3-5.05 deg.3 Alignment Procedure Value ____ Working Step 5 6 Fix the AHRU unit on the Tray. 13 Read the True Heading angle (H180-1T) of AHRU with an accuracy to the first decimal position. _ deg Make sure that a source (CDU/FMS or GNSS) to enter geographical position via ARINC 429 input on J6 to the system is available. Let the AHRU run for 10 minutes. H2T = _ _ _ . Determine the surveyed actual true heading (HA) of the A/C to an accuracy to the first decimal position ±0. _ deg RT = _ _ _. 12 Let the AHRU run for 10 minutes. Then read again the True Heading angle and record as (H2T) 11 While still powered. Turn the AHRU 180 deg and move it into the Adapter Tray.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2. ____ ____ 2.3. take the AHRU out of the Tray and install the Adapter Tray (refer to Figure 3-4). _ deg H1T = _ _ _.2. _ deg DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3015 July 2011 . Roll and True Heading data. _ deg ____ ____ H180-1T = _ _ _. Set the misalignment constants in the IDM to zero (Refer to L1MS User Manual).2 Preconditions Value ____ Working Step 1 2 3 4 Make sure the A/C is leveled in the principle A/C axes. Monitoring can be performed either on the ARINC 429 output or on the test output by means of the L1MS. ____ ____ ____ PT = _ _ _. Connect it with L1MS and A/C wiring as shown in section 3. Enter geographical position via FMS/CDU input or via GNSS input. _ deg 7 8 9 10 Wait 3 minutes. Ensure that it fits into the rails and that it does not move during test.2. Read the Pitch (PT) and Roll (RT) and True Heading angle (H1T) of AHRU. Round the angle to the nearest 0.3.1 deg value. HA = _ _ _ .

HA) HcomT = HcT-90 . _ deg HcT-90 = _ _ _ . _ deg RcomT = _ _ _ . 360 deg) may have to be subtracted from the result HcT-90 to get the Heading compensation value HcomT to be stored.3 Accuracy required to the first decimal position.g. This exit will switch-off the AHRU.: HcT-90 = 268.PT Roll compensation value (1) RcomT = . Pitch compensation value (1) PcomT = .180)) .7 -270 = -1..RT Heading compensation value HcT-90 = .5 (H180-1T + H180-2T) 17 Calculate the compensation values of AHRU to be stored in the IDM.7 HcomT = 268.(HT . 16 Calculate the mean values of the heading measurements H1T and H2T also H180-1T and H180-2T HT = 0.0. _ deg PcomT = _ _ _ .5 (H1T + H2T) H180T = 0. 270. _ deg H180T = _ _ _ .(H180T . e.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Working Step 14 Wait 3 min. pitch and roll with reference to the principal aircraft axes. 18 Store the compensation values into the IDM using the L1MS page "IDM Configuration" (refer to L1MS User Manual on the software disk of the L1MS). Then read again the True Heading angle and record as (H180-2T) 15 Exit the L1MS SW. 180. _ deg ____ The Pitch and Roll-compensation value may not exceed a value of 3° If the compensation value exceeds 3°. Now the compensation procedure for AHRU is finished. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3016 July 2011 .Cardinal angle (1) Dependent on the heading HA of the A/C the cardinal angle (90. Then take it out of the Adapter Tray and install it back to the original tray. _ deg ____ HT = _ _ _ . We recommend using a scientific calculator.5 (HT . 1) Value H180-2T = _ _ _. _ deg HcomT = _ _ _ . the mechanical Tray alignment has to be rectified by turning and shimming the tray until the alignment tolerance is within ± 3° in azimuth.

4. Monitoring can be performed either on the ARINC 429 output or on the test output by means of the L1MS. Let the unit run for 5 minutes. 4 Switch-on the AHRU and monitor the Pitch and Roll data. The required equipment L1MS Base Version is listed in Section 3.1 deg. _ deg RcomT = _ _ _ .1.2 Alignment Procedure Working Step 3 Fix the AHRU on the Tray.1 Preconditions Working Step 1 Make sure the A/C is leveled in the principle A/C axes. _ deg = _ _ _ . Round the angle to the nearest 0. PT RT Value ____ ____ = _ _ _ .1. Value ____ ____ 2.RT Accuracy required to the first decimal position. 5 Read the Pitch (PT) and Roll (RT) angle of AHRU on the L1MS page "Diagnostics" / "Data Monitoring". _ deg PcomT = _ _ _ . Figure 3-2.4. L1MS and A/C -cables: refer to section 3.3.3. Connect it with L1MS and A/C wiring as shown in section 3.2.PT Roll compensation value (1) RcomT = .2.2. NOTE For multiple LCR-100 installations in one aircraft this procedure is to be repeated accordingly 2. Wiring of AHRU. 2 Set the misalignment constants in the IDM to zero (Refer to L1MS User Manual). paragraph 1. _ deg DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3017 July 2011 . 6 Calculate the compensation values of the AHRU to be stored in the IDM.4 Tray Alignment procedure to determine Tray Misalignment Compensation Values for Pitch and Roll only This paragraph is applicable for all AHRS systems (including 145130-1002). Pitch compensation value (1) PcomT = .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2.3. Figure 3-2.

1) Value ____ The Pitch and Roll-compensation value may not exceed a value of 3° If the compensation value exceeds 3°..4 Determine Lever Arms from AHRU to the GNSS antennas This paragraph describes how to determine the GNSS Lever Arms Definition: Value of distance measurement .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Working Step 7 Store the compensation values into the IDM using the L1MS page "IDM Configuration" (refer to L1MS User Manual on the software disk of the L1MS). 2. pitch and roll with reference to the principal aircraft axes. Now the compensation procedure for AHRU is finished. the mechanical Tray alignment has to be rectified by turning and shimming the tray until the alignment tolerance is within ± 3° in azimuth.from the AHRU to the GNSS antennas in the A/C is positive if: x-axis points to forward direction y-axis points to the right wing z-axis points down +X GNSS-Antenna 1 RU AH +Y +Z GNSS-Antenna 2 LI0044R3 Figure 3-9 Lever Arms from AHRU to GNSS antennas (Example) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3018 July 2011 .

_ m GNSS2Z = _ _ . _ m surement axes (1) to the allocated GNSS-Antenna 2 in x.GNSS1X = _ _ .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Procedure Working Step Value 1 Measure the distance in meters from AHRU-Center of gyro mea. y and z direction of the A/C GNSS2Y = _ _ .GNSS2X = _ _ . y and z direction of the A/C GNSS1Y = _ _ . _ m 3 Store the 3 distance values in the IDM using the L1MS (refer to L1MS User Manual) 1) Position of the Center of gyro measurement axes: refer to AHRU Outline drawing. _ m surement axes (1) to the allocated GNSS-Antenna 1 in x. _ m GNSS1Z = _ _ . _ m 2 Measure the distance in meters from AHRU-Center of gyro mea. Figure 1-6 ____ DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3019 July 2011 .

_ _ m 1 Measure the distance in meters from AHRU Center of gyro measurement axes (1) to the A/C Center of Gravity in x. Figure 1-6 ____ DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3020 July 2011 . 2 Store the 3 distance values in the IDM using the L1MS (refer to L1MS User Manual). _ _ m CoGY = _ _ _ .Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2. 1) Position of the Center of gyro measurement axes: refer to AHRU Outline drawing. Note: The storage of the CoG Lever Arms is first possible from L1MS Version 1200.5 Determine Lever Arms from AHRU to the A/C Center of Gravity This paragraph describes how to determine the Lever Arms to A/C Center of Gravity Definition: Value of distance measurement from the AHRU to the A/C Center of Gravity is positive if: x-axis points to forward direction y-axis points to the right wing z-axis points down Figure 3-10 Procedure Working Step Lever Arms from AHRU to the A/C Center of Gravity (Example) Value CoGX = _ _ _ . y and z direction. _ _ m CoGZ = _ _ _ .

2. paragraph 4. A chart of fault monitoring provisions (Maintenance Discrete Outputs . The AHRS Fail warning Signal provides a fail warning Output each time one of the basic display warnings is set. one for each of the AHRUs.Labels 350 to 353) is included in Table 3-5 through Table 3-8. When power is applied to the System. a series of self-tests are performed to verify System functions. and troubleshooting is simplified by the built-in fault monitoring and self-test circuits of the AHRUs. In addition.3. Yaw Rate Fail and Turn Rate Fail warning Signals will set flags on the aircraft flight displays. paragraph 5. the System contains hardware and Software monitors and performs continuous background hardware and Software verification tests. are provided for implementation. The parameters Output and the associated test values are shown in section 1. The DITS Status Information is provided in section 1. Heading Fail.general remarks No manual testing of the AHRS is required. NOTE Paragraph 4.2 shows the check-list for the steps to be followed when a fault appears during an initial installation of a System. Actuation of the discrete causes that unit to Output test values to the aircraft Systems. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3021 July 2011 . The Maintenance Discrete Output words are shown in Table 3-5 through Table 3-8. Selftest discretes.1. The monitoring and warning criteria are stated and shown in Table 3-9. the check-list may also be consulted as a fault finding guide during the time that the equipment is in Service. This AHRS Fail warning can be used in conjunction with the MASTER WARNING display system.6.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 3 Initial Installation . Attitude Fail. Manually initiated self-tests can also be performed on each of the individual AHRUs. Likewise. Failure of these tests results in the Output of warn Signals or System shutdown.

(8) IDM (J5) (Signals and Pin Assignment J5: refer to Table 1-86) The IDM will be mounted on J5 and stores compensation data for MSU (Flux Valve). Pin-9/Pin-30/Pin-51) if applicable. Pin-60 (mandatory) if applicable (refer to Table 1-79). Power to control discretes using J1. Pin-15 as ground reference. Check for connection between J4. Please note that the WOW Signal MUST be present at that time when power is applied to the AHRS.2 in this section. Pin-39 and J4.1 Initial Installation Check If you are working on an initial installation. paragraph 4. (6) Synchro I/O (J3) (Signals and Pin Assignment J3: refer to Table 1-84) Check if all used synchro and two wire AC outputs have their respective input (reference) voltage. the connector of the tray mounts to J2 of the AHRS. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3022 July 2011 . Pin-1/Pin-9 and J1. Check all used operational interfaces (ARINC 429). Pin-37). Pin-3/Pin-11 and J1. Pin-4/Pin-12. Pin-2/Pin-10 If used auxiliary power at J1. (5) Fan (J2) (Signals and Pin Assignment J2: refer to Table 1-83) In case the AHRS is mounted on a tray with fan. Mounting correction and Acceleration monitor.2. If HSI/ADI indicates incorrect operation please refer to paragraph 3.2 and item (8) of this paragraph. the AHRS should power up and indicate proper Operation (flags are out of view) after 25 seconds of alignment time. The next verification step would test the displays or indicators for correct display of data. Check if all outputs have their respective wiring. Check the program pins to satisfy the ODD parity. Pin-2 and -22 respectively J4. a general test shall be applied to ensure correct control of the AHRS. Check the MSU (Flux Valve) connection with respect to section 1. refer to section 1.) (4) Power Supply (J1) (Signals and Pin Assignment J1: refer to Table 1-82) Primary power available at J1. If power is applied to the AHRS. the following list may help you to check the layout of your wiring. Check used control discretes. Please note that this will enable a fan test that monitors the current to the fan. Pin-8 with J1. (Front view of LCR-100 with all connectors: refer to Figure 1-5. If the AHRS indicates proper operation. The IDM stays with the tray (if not defective) and is therefore tied to the tray using a cord. Table 1-85 (J4.1. (7) I/O (J4) (Signals and Pin Assignment J4: refer to Table 1-85) This paragraph is only applicable if a MSU is available.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 3. Check WOW (J4.

You will get non-valid indication of the HSI and ADI if the requirement is not satisfied. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3023 July 2011 . (11) Verify Programming Discretes Connect ARINC 429 Reader to AHRS ARINC Output and switch to read Label 303 (input discrete 1) on the ARINC reader (input discrete word 1. All data bits should be set to '0'.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Basic tool to check out an existing installation for proper operation is an ARINC 429 reader and some kind of J4 or J6 Break-Out Cable that allows to have access to one of the six ARINC data busses coming from the AHRS. (10) Verify proper AHRS Operation using Maintenance Labels Connect ARINC 429 Reader to AHRS ARINC output and switch to read Label 350 through 353. If one or more bits are set to '1'. the problem is in the wiring from the AHRS to the indicator.3 in this section). Alternatively you can follow the instructions given in the troubleshooting procedures (refer to paragraph 3.2 in this section. (9) I/O (J6) (Signals and Pin Assignment J6: refer to Table 1-87) Check all used operational interfaces (ARINC 429). Label 303: refer to Table 1-66). If all data bits are '0' but your indicator shows invalid data. please refer to paragraph 4. Verify your installation setup as there are Mounting Position 1 on Bit 14 (set to one if activated) Mounting Position 2 on Bit 15 (set to one if activated) Parity on Bit 18 (set to one if activated) DG Mode Logic Select on Bit 19 (set to one if activated) Yaw/Rate SF Select 1 (1) / DADS Select 1 (2) on Bit 20 (set to one if activated) Yaw/Rate SF Select 2 (1) / DADS Select 2 (2) on Bit 21 (set to one if activated) ARINC Turn Rate Select on Bit 22 (set to one if activated) Ground/Air Logic Select on Bit 23 (set to one if activated) MSU Excitation Voltage Select on Bit 24 (set to one if activated) ARINC Update Rate Select on Bit 25 (set to one if activated) 1) 2) Only for systems with AHRS and gyrocompassing functions and with Synchro Interface Module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx) Only for systems with AHRS and gyrocompassing functions without Synchro Interface Module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-1xxx) NOTE Please check that the sum of activated inputs MUST be an ODD number.

+ 5° pitch and + 15° Heading display. 3. Alternatively watch the ADI/HSI to indicate a + 45° Roll. Rotate AHRS + 5° Roll (right wing down) and watch the ADI to respond respectively. Alternatively you can activate the selftest with the AHRS on ground. Toggle the Slew Left Switch with the DG/Mag Switch in DG Mode in the cockpit and watch Bit 21 to toggle. Rotate AHRS -5° Roll (left wing down) and watch the ADI to respond respectively. Check out also other indicators like stormscope etc. Watch HSI to respond respectively. Toggle the GND / In Air switch to In Air and watch Bit 23 to toggle.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 (12) Verify Input Discretes Connect ARINC 429 Reader to AHRS ARINC Output and switch to read Label 304 (input discrete 2) on the ARINC reader.2 Initial AHRS and Indicator Checks The proper operation of the AHRS together with the displays like HSI/ADI or MFD may be done as follows: (1) - Check HSI Turn A/C clockwise by more than + 5°. Toggle the DG/Mag or Free/Slaved Switch in the cockpit and watch Bit 19 to toggle. Rotate AHRS -5° Pitch (nose up) and watch the ADI to respond respectively. The description assumes the A/C is On Ground. Alternatively the HSI may indicate DG Mode if applicable. If you set the AHRS into "In Air" mode. Check out also other indicators like MFD etc. Verify your installation Toggle the Selftest Switch in the cockpit and watch Bit 16 to toggle. The HSI will increase heading. Check ADI Release AHRS from tray (refer to Figure 4-3). This will not work when the Ground/Air discrete input indicates "in air". the selftest will be inhibited. The HSI will decrease heading. (2) - DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3024 July 2011 . This will cause HSI/ADI as explained before. Toggle the Slew Right Switch with the DG/MAG SWITCH in DG Mode in the cockpit and watch Bit 22 to toggle. Rotate AHRS + 5° Pitch (nose up) and watch the ADI to respond respectively.

the Break Out box as part of the Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH Level 1 Maintenance Set may be used. paragraph 5.3.3. an error indication will prompt the pilot or ground crew for incorrect operation of the AHRS and the Fault Indicator on the front plate of the AHRU will be set. one set is performed at power up and another one is performed continuously. If there is any fault indication. one or more of the data bits are set to '1'.5) using special equipment. Connect the ARINC Reader with the Break-Out Cable.8 it is recommended to use the Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH Level 1 Maintenance Set. Alternatively. Most of the test results will be latched and at power down this information will be stored in the internal memory and can be downloaded from the AHRS (refer to section 3. Check with the ARINC reader Labels 350 through 353.2 Check Fault Indicator If the LED on the front plate of the AHRU is flashing: Try to reset fault indicator by pressing the push button. Power up the AHRS. Connect the ARINC Break-Out Cable also with LCR-100.3 - Recommended Tools - To perform activities as described in paragraph 1.3. If reset is not successful: AHRU must be checked because fault is still present (refer to paragraph 3.3.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 3.1.1 Trouble Shoot AHRS Problems General Description The Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH AHRS performs two sets of BIT (Built In Tests).3.4 - - Power down the AHRS pulling the circuit breakers and connect the Bus Reader with the ARINC break out cable.3.3 3. To perform activities as described in section 2.2 in this section. please refer to paragraph 4. you will need an ARINC 429 Bus reader and ARINC breakout cable to read one of the six ARINC busses from the AHRS. paragraph 3. If reset is successful: failure is not present any more. If one or more of the tests are faulty. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3025 July 2011 . At this time the AHRS will output the results of the BIT tests on Label 350 through 353 (refer to activity 1. 3. The failure can be evaluated by reading out the BIT history.1(7)).7.4 of this section). Fault is still present AND you have an ARINC 429 Bus reader 3. 3.

7. To do this you need either the Level 1 Maintenance Set or an equivalent test tool to read the BIT History. For values of selftest data output refer to section 1.3. If the fault indicator is set active. Please refer to the appropriate pages in the User Manual. 3.3. 3. The fault indicator can be deactivated by pressing the mode button on the front plate of the AHRU if no BIT detected failure exists anymore and the system is either in the alignment or in the operational mode. Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH recommends using the Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH tool because the SW will be maintained on regular basis. It is assumed that the SW has been successfully installed on a desktop or laptop computer.7.g. the MSU calibration mode cannot be entered by using the mode button.3.1.2 ARINC 429 Output during Normal Operation DITS Labels 350 . paragraph 5. Connect the J6 connector with the AHRS and A/C wiring. After pressing the mode button the LED flashes 10 times at a rate of 2 Hz. the LED on the front plate of the AHRU flashes with a frequency of 1 Hz. After the next power up.353 contain discrete information that is helpful in fault finding. New SW will be distributed to all users or on request. - Power down the AHRS (pulling the circuit breaker).1 Failure Indication Fault Indicator The fault indicator is set active and latched if the BIT detects an AHRU hardware related failure.6 Functional self test can be activated when aircraft is on ground and the selftest data discrete is activated. If the fault indicator is set active. Start Level 1 software on the computer. This information represents the actual failure status of the system and will be provided during normal operation.3.3. Switch Test Mode to ON and turn on power to the AHRS.5 Fault is not present OR you do not have a ARINC 429 Bus reader In this case the stored records of the BIT History will be downloaded and analyzed. Selftest Data Output 3.7 3.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 3. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3026 July 2011 . the fault indicator remains active (e. Connect computer with L1MS Break Out box. LED still flashing).

7. Without Level 1 Maintenance Set: If the system is in maintenance test mode. The range of elapsed time recording is more than 100.7. the failure history and the elapsed time are provided via the ARINC 429 output channels 2 and 6 without any test equipment.6 Maintenance Output via Test Interface The elapsed time is transmitted with a resolution of 0.3.000 hours.4 Elapsed Time Counter The elapsed time counter indicates the total operating system time. 3. 3. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3027 July 2011 .3 Failure Logging and Malfunction Storage The system records failure data. the current system time (Label 302).3.1 hours.3. The complete BIT history is transmitted cyclically.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 3.5 Output of the Failure History and Elapsed Time With Level 1 Maintenance Set: In maintenance test mode the failure history and the elapsed time are output by the means of the L1MS via the activated test interface. The stored data is marked with the time tag derived from the elapsed time counter. The failure history and the elapsed time are transmitted cyclically starting with the accumulated operating hours followed by the most recent failure record. the current temperature and the status of the air/ground discrete. 3. After all records have been transmitted the system is waiting for one second before repeating the output.7.7.3.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3028 July 2011 .g. The monitoring and warning criteria are stated and shown in paragraph 4.3. Tray…) and not on the AHRU itself.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4 4.g. if external fault is eliminated). Table 3-5 to Table 3-8 define the allocation of these bits. wiring. MSU. than first try to reset fault indicator. In case the fault indicator (LED on the front panel of AHRU) is blinking (refer to Figure 1-7). In most cases the failure disappears. This information represents the actual failure status of the system and will be provided during normal operation. electrical or digital interface) or on one of the AHRS-components (e. Only if reset is not possible and the proposed actions in the tables do not help it is necessary to return AHRU for Repair. then read out and check the BIT history entry for failure information. IDM. 4. summarizing the no computed data (NCD) conditions. it is sufficient to reset the fault indicator (only possible. How to reset the fault indicator The fault indicator can be reset when the AHRU is switched on by pressing the Mode Button on the front side of the AHRU (refer to Figure 1-7) for minimum 2 seconds. Proposed general corrective action If the failure is caused by the AHRU.1 System Integrity General This chapter deals with the output state of the system during normal operation and for any detected failure either internal to the system or to the inputs.2 Maintenance Discrete Outputs DITS Labels 350 . If the failure is not caused by the AHRU but on A/C side (e. DITS SSM Failure Annunciation is provided in Table 3-10.353 contain discrete information that is helpful in fault finding. Check the bits set on Label 350-353 and continue with the proposed action given in Table 3-5 to Table 3-8.

0012 0084 AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective IDM not installed IDM defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective Insufficient or excessive current to fan AHRU defective No data from DADS or ARINC input defective Proposed general corrective action. 0031 0070. page 3028 Check installation. 0071. 0073. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 350 Bit No. it is necessary to re-align it! DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3029 July 2011 . page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. 0072. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check IDM installation (Connect with AHRUConnector 1J5) Replace IDM (2) Proposed general corrective action. 0013 0011. Replace Tray with fan if current less than 25 mA or more than 160 mA (3): Return Tray for Repair Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. 1-8 9-10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Function Label SDI System Fault Indicator (1) NV RAM Fail Oscillator Divider Fail SRAM Fail Flash Fail IDM Fail BIT Test ID Possible cause Corrective Action 0007. 0074 0014 0004 0018 0001 0003. 0017 0002 0005. Check Fan supply voltage and current 24 V/80 mA. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. When replacing a defective with a new tray. page 3028 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Not used (always 0) Scheduler Fail Not used (always 0) Watchdog Fail PIC Fail Not used (always 0) Processor Fail Start Up Occasion Fail Not used (always 0) Illegal Exception Fail Fan Supply Monitor 28 29 30-31 32 PM FPGA Wrap Around Fail No DADS information available SSM Parity (odd) 0008 Table 3-5 1) 2) 3) Maintenance Discrete Word 1 (Label 350) Bit will be set when fault indicator is set If possible transfer the data from the defective to the new IDM using L1MS. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. 0015 0016. page 3028 Check wiring/installation Check ARINC input Proposed general corrective action.

0113 0114. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 No action Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 16 17 Gyro NOGO Max. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. Angular Rate exceeded 0121 0108 Proposed general corrective action.g. 0126 0107 27 28 29 Vertical Earth Rate Fail Not used (always 0) Vertical Acceleration Bias Fail 0101 0109 30-31 32 SSM Parity (odd) Table 3-6 Maintenance Discrete Word 2 (Label 351) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3030 July 2011 . page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check plausibility of excessive rates Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check if pressure altitude input from DADS has shown jumps or high ramps e. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. 1-8 9 . page 3028 Check plausibility of excessive accelerations Proposed general corrective action. 0111 0112. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. induced by tests Proposed general corrective action.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 351 Bit No. 0115 0125. always 0 Maintenance Flag Gyro Warn Bit Test ID Possible Cause Proposed Action for Customers 0124 0120 Degradation Degradation Overrange or Overtemperature AHRU defective Excessive rates (more than 600°/s) occurred AHRU defective Overrange or Overtemperature AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective Excessive acceleration (more than 10g) occurred AHRU defective AHRU defective To high change in pressure altitude AHRU defective Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Not used (always 0) Accelerometer Warn Accelerometer NOGO IMU NOGO IMU Interface Time Out Fail IMU Interface Data Fail IMU Interface Sequence Fail Accelerometer Not Initialized Max.10 11-13 14 15 Function Label SDI Not used. Acceleration exceeded 0122 0123 0106 0110.

0061 0040 0057 24 25 26 27 28 29 MSU Excitation Fail Not used (always 0) SPI Communication Test IFM FPGA Test Register Test IFM FPGA Wrap Around Fail GNSS Time Mark Fail 30-31 32 SSM Parity (odd) Table 3-7 Maintenance Discrete Word 3 (Label 352) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3031 July 2011 . page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. 0058 0054 22 MSU Connection Fail 23 MSU Short Circuit 0044. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. 0053 0046 0022. page 3028 Check installation/wiring Return AHRU for Repair Check installation/wiring Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 21 Program Pin Fail 0043. 0050 0042. 1-8 9-10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Function Label SDI PM DITS Receiver Overflow PM DITS Transmitter Not Ready PM DITS Wrap Around Fail IFM DITS Receiver Overflow IFM DITS Transmitter Not Ready IFM DITS Wrap Around Fail ADC Fail DAC Fail IFM Discrete Output Fail MSU Reference Input Fail Bit Test ID Possible Cause Proposed Action for Customers 0032. 0023 0060. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check installation/wiring Check GPS time mark signal Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 352 Bit No. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action.to J4-60 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check installation/wiring Proposed general corrective action. 0033 0020 0021 0047 0048 0049 0041. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. 0051 0052 0055 AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective No input signal at J4-60 available AHRU defective Parity of program pins incorrect AHRU defective MSU not connected AHRU defective MSU input short circuit AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective AHRU defective Interface to GPS receiver time mark AHRU defective Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check availability of jumper J4-39.

page 3028 Check wiring Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check wiring to/from synchros Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check wiring to/from 26V/400Hz. page 3028 15 0233 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0230 0228 0229 0236 0235 0211 0231 0234 24 25 26-29 30-31 32 0237 0224 Table 3-8 1) Maintenance Discrete Word 4 (Label 353) Waveform of input: sinusoidal. section 16. page 3028 Check wiring to/from 26V/400Hz Check waveform of input (1) Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check wiring to/from synchros Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check wiring Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check wiring to/from synchros Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check wiring to/from synchros Proposed general corrective action.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label 353 Bit No. 1-8 9-10 11 12 13 14 Function Label SDI Not used Synchro E²PROM Fail Synchro SPI Fail Attitude Reference Unavailable Heading Reference 1 Unavailable Heading Synchro 1 Fail Roll Synchro Fail Pitch Synchro Fail Yaw Rate DC Output Fail Turn Rate DC Output Fail SIM Discrete Output Fail Heading Synchro 2 Fail Heading Reference 2 Unavailable Normal Acceleration DC Output Fail SIM ADC Fail Not used SSM Parity (odd) BIT Possible Cause Test ID Proposed Action for Customers 0200 0202 0205 0232 AHRU defective AHRU defective No external input or input voltage form AHRU defective No external input or input voltage form AHRU defective Short circuit in wiring AHRU defective Short circuit in wiring AHRU defective Short circuit in wiring AHRU defective Short circuit in wiring AHRU defective Short circuit in wiring AHRU defective AHRU defective Short circuit in wiring AHRU defective No external input or input voltage form AHRU defective Short circuit in wiring AHRU defective AHRU defective Proposed general corrective action. page 3028 Check wiring to/from synchros Proposed general corrective action. Check waveform of input (1) Proposed general corrective action.4 DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3032 July 2011 . according DO-160E. page 3028 Check wiring to/from 26V/400Hz Check waveform of input (1) Proposed general corrective action.

Numbers marked by an asterisk indicates the "0" state of these bits.e. An indication is given as to which tests are latched. after the first failure. data validity check and software test in the system which contributes to the fault monitoring. turn rate and AHRS warn are also indicated on Label 271. Then. BITE and SHUTDOWN conditions is provided. the logic for combining these to produce the WARN. Flight critical failures. together with the discrete output on Label 270 and 271 and the failure warning in SSM of the digital binary ARINC outputs. NOTE The numbers in columns Label 270 and 271 indicate which bits within the corresponding word are set to "1". to a permanently set state. yaw rate.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3033 July 2011 . will cause an AHRU shut-down and are marked in the SHUTDOWN column.3 AHRS Fault Monitoring Summary The following table itemizes each failure condition. attitude. The discrete outputs heading. failures which may generate misleading information and affect aircraft safety. i.

17. F: Airborne. 16. 21 14. 16. 16. 16. altitude D: Address. failure annunciation suppressed until 60s after landing D: ARINC channel F: Hybrid Free inertial operation and indication (Label 274) D: ARINC channel x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 350/18 350/14 350/15 350/12 Normal 0018 PIC Test C 1s x x 19 17 350/21 Normal 0032 DITS PM Receiver Overflow channel 3 and 4 DITS PM Receiver Overflow channel 5 and 6 C 100 ms x x x 19 17 352/11 Normal 0033 C 100 ms x x x x x x 15. 19 15. 21 352/11 All Labels NCD DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3034 July 2011 . 19 19 14. 17. 19 15. 15. 21 14. 16. 16. 15. 21 14. failure annunciation suppressed until 60s after landing D: PIC status F: Short Power Interrupt disabled. 15. 15. 16. 16. 17. 16. 15. 19 15. 17. Exception number D: Program Counter F: Hardware Reset D: Task ID D: Address. 21 14. failure annunciation suppressed until 60s after landing. altitude F: Short Power Interrupt disabled. 17. 17. If airborne. 16. 16. 17. 21 14. 21 14. 19 15. 15. 17. 15. 19 14. 16. 16. 15. 21 14. altitude D: Failed NV RAM address or block number. 16. 17. 15. altitude D: Failed Data Block D: Failed NV RAM address or block number. 16. If airborne. 17. 19 15. 19 15. 16. 17. 17. 16. Short Power Interrupt disabled D: ARINC channel 0008 PM FPGA Wrap Around Test P x x x 19 17 350/28 Fault on all Labels in faulty channel 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 Illegal Exception Illegal Trap Exception Test Program Cycle Test Scheduler Test Continuous SRAM Test Continuous Flash Test Continuous NV RAM Test C 1s C 2s C 2s C 2s C 1s C 1s C 1s x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 15. 19 15. 16. 21 17 350/26 350/26 350/24 D: Program Counter. 21 14. 15. 15. 21 14. 16. 16. 19 15. 19 19 14. 16. 19 15. 16. 21 17 350/23 350/13 350/24 350/20 350/14 350/15 350/12 Normal D: Value of Divider Register D: Address of fault cell in SRAM.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Warn Discrete Output Yaw / Turn Rate Warn Discrete Words Maintenance Discrete Label/Bit Bit history Entry x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Fail Latched = L HDG Warn 1 + 2 Bit in Label 270 Bit in Label 271 (1) Fault Indicator Reaction Time System Warn SSM on DITS (2) Test Phase C: Comment D: Diagnostic Information F: Fault Reaction Test ID 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0031 0007 Monitoring Test Performed by the system Processor Test Check of Oscillator Divider Startup Occasion Test Watchdog Test Startup SRAM Test Startup Flash Test Startup NV RAM Test P P P P P P P N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Reset Hold ATT Warn x x x x x x x 15. 16. 15. 16.

21 17 352/26 352/26 Normal Type 1 C: In Navigation or ATT/DG mode. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3035 July 2011 . 16. 17. 16. 16. 0053. 15. 19 14. 19 17 14. 19 16. 17 352/17 F: Airborne in Navigation Mode or attitude/DG mode failure annunciation suppressed until 60s after landing.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Warn Discrete Output Yaw / Turn Rate Warn Discrete Words Maintenance Discrete Label/Bit Bit history Entry x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Fail Latched = L HDG Warn 1 + 2 Bit in Label 270 Bit in Label 271 (1) Fault Indicator Reaction Time System Warn SSM on DITS (2) Test Phase C: Comment D: Diagnostic Information F: Fault Reaction D: ARINC channel Test ID 0020 Monitoring Test Performed by the system DITS PM Transmitter Not Ready C 100 ms x x Reset Hold ATT Warn x 19 17 352/12 Fault on all Labels in faulty channel Fault on all Labels in faulty channel 0021 DITS PM Wrap Around Test C 1s x x x 19 17 352/13 D: ARINC channel 0022 0023 SPI Communication Test Synchro SPI MSU ADC SPI C C x x x x x x x x x x x 16. 15. 21 14. 0050. 0046. 17. Free inertial indication (Label 274) D: ARINC channel C 100 ms 0048 DITS IFM Transmitter Not Ready Test C 100 ms x x 19 17 352/15 Fault on all Labels in faulty channel Fault on all Labels in faulty channel Type 1 0049 DITS IFM Wrap Around Test C 1s x x x 19 17 352/16 D: ARINC channel 0050 A/D Converter Continuous Test C 1s x x x 16. 19 14. 0042. MAG mode and MSU Calibration mode disabled 0044 0045 MSU Short Circuit Test MSU Connection Test P P N/A N/A x 19 22 352/23 Type 1 0046 0047 MSU Excitation Test DITS IFM Receiver Overflow Test P N/A x x x x 19 19 17 352/24 352/14 Normal D: measured value D: ARINC channel F: P/N -1002 Hybrid: if channel 1. 17 352/17 352/18 352/21 Type 4 D: Failed ADC channel D: Value of all program pins C: Test disabled in test mode D: measured value C: Test disabled for P/N 145130-6xxx and -7xxx F: If this test fails the tests 0041. 0054 and 0055 are disabled. test is disabled D: ARINC channel 0040 IFM FPGA Wrap Around Test P N/A x x x 19 352/28 Fault on all Labels in faulty channel 0041 0042 0043 SPI ADC Test SPI DAC Test Program Pin Test P P P N/A N/A N/A x x x x x x x x x x 19 19 15.

17 14. 16. 16. 21 14. 16. 16. 19 16. 16. 17. 15. 16. 19 15. Connection Test MSU Reference Input Test C 1s P N/A x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Reset Hold ATT Warn x x 19 15. C: In Navigation Mode or attitude/DG mode fault reaction suppressed. 21 14. 19 16. D: Failed channel F: Hybrid navigation free inertial. 22 14. 17 350/27 356/21 351/27 Normal C: Test performed on ground only. 17. 21 14. 15. 17. 19 16. 16. 16. 21 14. 21 17 17 17 352/19 352/27 352/27 350/16 350/16 350/16 350/16 350/16 Type 7 Type 1 Type 4 Normal C 100 ms P P P P P N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A x x x x x x F: Airborne failure annunciation suppressed until 60s after landing. F: Airborne in Navigation Mode or attitude/DG mode failure annunciation suppressed until 60s after landing. 16.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Warn Discrete Output Yaw / Turn Rate Warn Discrete Words Maintenance Discrete Label/Bit Bit history Entry x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Fail Latched = L HDG Warn 1 + 2 Bit in Label 270 Bit in Label 271 (1) Fault Indicator Reaction Time System Warn SSM on DITS (2) Test Phase C: Comment D: Diagnostic Information F: Fault Reaction Test ID 0051 0052 0053 0054 Monitoring Test Performed by the system Slaving Error Wrap Around Test IFM Discrete Output Test MSU Cont. 16. 15. 17 352/21 Type 4 0059 0060 0061 0070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 IFM Discrete Output Test FPGA Test Register Test FPGA Test Register Test MSU CalProm Test Mounting Correction Test Lever Arm Test GPS Lever Arm Test MAGVAR Model Data Test Power Supply Monitor Line Voltage Monitor Boost Overvoltage Monitor DC/DC Converter Monitor Fan Supply Monitor C 200 ms P N/A x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 15. 17. 16. 0055 C 1s x x 16 352/20 Type 1 0056 MSU Data Test C 100 ms C 100 ms 23 Normal 0057 GPS Time Mark Test 352/29 Normal 0058 Program Pin Continuous Test C 1s x x 15. 19 14. C: Test disabled in test mode C 1 ms C N/A C N/A C N/A C 1s x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 13. after landing test disabled for 60s F: Shutdown C: Pure Hardware Function 0101 Vertical Earth Rate C x x x 19 17 Normal DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3036 July 2011 . C: Test disabled in test mode D: Value of all program pins F: Airborne. failure annunciation suppressed until 60s after landing. 17. 15. 15. 19 15. 16. 19 19 19 19 14. 15. 19 15. 17 352/18 352/19 352/23 352/22 Normal C 1s C 1s Type 1 Type 1 D: measured value F: Airborne in Navigation Mode or attitude/DG mode failure annunciation suppressed until 60s after landing. Short Circuit Test MSU Cont. 17. 19 17 14. 17 14.

5 ms x x C 2.5 ms x x C 2. 15. Failure reaction suppressed in air until 60s after landing D: IMU status word D: IMU status word F: Fault reaction suppressed in air until 60s after landing D: IMU status word D: IMU status word C: recovery only after power off C: recovery only after power off C: test only performed airborne when valid pressure altitude is available. 16. 17. 16. 21 351/23 351/23 Type 4 F: change to attitude mode D: number of failed tests since power on x x x x x x x 19 15. 21 12. D: Vertical Acceleration Bias x x x x x x x 19 15. 21 12. 21 17 351/20 Type 4 0125 Accelerometer Not Initialized 351/25 Type 6 0126 0106 0107 0108 0109 Accelerometer Not Initialized IMU NOGO Max Acceleration Exceeded Max Angular Rate Exceeded Vertical Acceleration Bias Test C 5ms C 5ms C 5ms C x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 15. 16. 16. 15. 16. 19 15. 15. 16. 19 17 14. 17. 19 17 14. 14.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Warn Discrete Output Yaw / Turn Rate Warn Discrete Words Maintenance Discrete Label/Bit Bit history Entry x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Fail Latched = L HDG Warn 1 + 2 Bit in Label 270 Bit in Label 271 (1) Fault Indicator Reaction Time System Warn SSM on DITS (2) Test Phase C: Comment D: Diagnostic Information F: Fault Reaction Test ID Monitoring Test Performed by the system IMU Interface Time Out Test 3 fails during power cycle Failure rate exceeding 1 per 400 messages IMU Interface Data Test 3 fails during power cycle Failure rate exceeding 1 per 400 messages IMU Interface Sequence Test 3 fails during power cycle Failure rate exceeding 1 per 400 messages IMU BIT Status C 2. 19 19 14. 15. 16. delay 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 0115 Reset Hold ATT Warn F: change to attitude mode D: number of failed tests since power on 0120 Gyro Warn 0121 0122 Gyro Nogo Accelerometer Warn x x x x x x x x 15. 15. 21 14. 16. 17. 21 351/22 351/22 Type 4 F: change to attitude mode D: number of failed tests since power on. 16. 21 12. max. 16. 17. 15. 16. 19 15. 16.5 ms x x 19 17 351/15 Normal C: Test disabled in attitude mode F: Fault reaction after 30s continuous fail. 15. 16.5 ms x x C 2. 14. 21 17 351/25 351/21 351/26 351/17 351/29 Type 4 Type 4 Type 5 Type 5 Normal x x DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3037 July 2011 . 16. 14. change to attitude mode D: IMU status word D: IMU status word C: Test disabled in attitude mode F: Fault reaction after 30s continuous fail. 19 19 12. 17. 17. 17 351/16 351/19 Type 4 Normal 0123 0124 Accelerometer Nogo Maintenance Flag x x x x x x x x 15. 16 19 12. 15. 17. 16. 17. 21 351/24 351/24 Type 4 x x x x x x x 19 15. change to attitude mode D: IMU status word D: IMU status word F: Fault reaction after 100s continuous fail. 17. 15. 14. 16 15. 19 17 14. 16.

17 353/12 353/13 Normal Normal 0203 C 10 ms P N/A x x x x x 16. 21 12. 19 353/21 353/25 353/17 353/18 353/16 353/22 353/14 Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal D: Faulty Discrete 1 2 x D: transmitted and read back values x D: measured value F: tests 0228 and 0229 disabled D: measured value F: test 0230 disabled D: measured value F: test 0231 disabled D: Expected and read back voltages 0233 0234 0235 0236 0237 C 1s C 1s C 1s C 1s C 1s 1 2 T Y x x x x x 16 16 19 19 19 14. 17 14. 21 14. 17. 17. 21 16.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Warn Discrete Output Yaw / Turn Rate Warn Discrete Words Maintenance Discrete Label/Bit Bit history Entry x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Fail Latched = L HDG Warn 1 + 2 Bit in Label 270 Bit in Label 271 (1) Fault Indicator Reaction Time System Warn SSM on DITS (2) Test Phase C: Comment D: Diagnostic Information F: Fault Reaction Test ID 0200 0202 Monitoring Test Performed by the system E²PROM Test Synchro SPI-Interface Wrap Around MDAC Test Synchro SPI-Interface Wrap Around MDAC Test Synchro SPI-Interface Wrap Around Relay Test Synchro SPI-Interface Wrap Around Relay Test SIM Discrete Output Test ADC Test Roll Synchro Angle Test Pitch Synchro Angle Test HDG 1 Synchro Angle Test HDG 2 Synchro Angle Test Synchro Attitude Reference Voltage Test Synchro HDG 1 Reference Voltage Test Synchro HDG 2 Reference Voltage Test Turn Rate DC Test Yaw Rate DC Test Normal Acceleration DC Test P P N/A N/A x x x x x x x x x Reset Hold ATT Warn x x 16. 16. 21 15. 17. 16. 19 353/13 Normal 0205 C 10 ms C 500 ms C 1s C 1s C 1s C 1s C 1s C 1s x x x x x x x 16. 17 17. 16. 17 14. 15. 17. 17 353/15 353/23 353/20 353/19 353/24 Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Table 3-9 1) 2) Test Catalogue and Fault Reaction Bit 16 in Label 271 only applicable for systems with installed synchro interface module (LCR-100 P/N 145130-2xxx and –7xxx) SSM Annunciation related to failure types in table DITS SSM Failure Annunciation (refer to Table 3-10) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3038 July 2011 . 17 12. 19 16. 19 19 19 16. 15. 17. 15. 14. 17 14. 21 14. 15. 19 353/13 Normal 0211 0224 0228 0229 0230 0231 0232 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 15. 15. 15. 17 15. 19 14. 15. 17 14. 16. 16. 17 15. 19 16. 21 14. 19 16. 19 353/13 Normal 0204 x x x x x x x 16. 17 14. 16.

3. 1 – Maintenance Discr. Acceleration Cross Hdg. System Time Input Discrete 1 Input Discrete 2 Alignment Countdown MSU Fieldstrength True Heading Mag Heading Pitch Angle Roll Angle Body Pitch Rate Body Roll Rate Body Yaw/ Turn Rate (8) Body Long. 4 MSU Calibration Error System Input Status Inertial Altitude Vertical Acceleration Inertial Vertical Speed Along Hdg.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 4.1 Label DITS SSM Failure Annunciation Parameter Type 1 (MSU Heading related) Type 2 (Gyro related) Fault Type 3 (Accelerometer related) Type 4 (IMU and Platform related) Fault Type 5 (Rate/Acceleration related) NCD (1) Type 6 (Accelerometer reset related) Type 7 MAGVAR Model loss related 040 046 151 152 155 156 270 271 272 275 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 314 320 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 336 337 340 350 – 353 354 356 361 364 365 375 376 377 147 310 311 312 313 Body Turn Rate Software Version System Discrete 4 System Discrete 5 Configuration Discrete 1 Configuration Discrete 2 System Discrete 1 System Discrete 2 System Discrete 3 Command Discrete Magnetic Sensor Input Body Normal Accel. Acceleration Body Normal Acceleration Magnetic Sensor Input Pitch Attitude Rate Roll Attitude Rate Turn rate (8) Maintenance Discr. Acceleration Body Lat. Acceleration Equipment Identification Magnetic Variation Present Pos Lat Present Pos Long Ground Speed Track Angle True Fault Fault Fault NCD (3) Fault Fault (7) Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD (1) NCD (1) NCD (1) NCD (2) NCD (2) NCD (2) NCD (1) NCD (1) NCD (1) NCD NCD NCD (9) Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Fault Fault Fault Fault NCD Fault NCD Fault Fault NCD Fault Fault Fault Fault NCD Fault NCD Fault Fault NCD Fault Fault Fault Fault NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3039 July 2011 .

Label 330: Body Yaw Rate.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Label Parameter Type 1 (MSU Heading related) Type 2 (Gyro related) Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Type 3 (Accelerometer related) Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Type 4 (IMU and Platform related) Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Type 5 (Rate/Acceleration related) NCD (5) NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD (2) NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD (5) NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD (4) NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD (2) NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD NCD Type 6 (Accelerometer reset related) Type 7 MAGVAR Model loss related 315 316 317 321 322 323 335 360 362 363 366 367 372 373 374 055 104 105 106 132 134 135 137 153 154 160 175 254 255 256 257 261 262 263 264 266 267 274 344 345 346 Wind Speed Wind Direct True Track Angle (Mag) Drift Angle Flight Path Angle Flight Path Accel Track Angle Rate Potential Vert Speed (10) Along Tk Horiz. Label 340: Turn Rate Fault if System is in Navigation Mode Label 360: Not for P/N 145130-3000. Acceleration Cross Tk Horiz. Acceleration N-S Velocity E-W Velocity Wind Direction Magnetic N-S Velocity Mag E-W Velocity Mag Hybrid Mag Heading (10) Hybrid Wind Speed Hybrid Wind Direction True Hybrid Wind Direction Mag Hybrid True Heading Hybrid Potential Vert Spd Hybrid Vertical FOM Hybrid Track Angle Hybrid Track Angle Mag Hybrid Track Angle Rate Hybrid Drift Angle Hybrid Ground Speed Hybrid Latitude Hybrid Longitude Hybrid Latitude Fine Hybrid Longitude Fine Hybrid Altitude (MSL) Hybrid Flight Path Accel. Hybrid Flight Path Angle Hybrid Horizontal FOM Hybrid N-S Velocity Hybrid E-W Velocity Hybrid Status Hybrid Along HDG Velocity Hybrid Vertical Velocity Hybrid Across HDG Velocity Fault NCD NCD NCD NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) NCD (6) Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault NCD Table 3-10 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) DITS SSM Failure Annunciation 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) NCD in attitude mode only. Label 055 for P/N 145130-3000 only For rates in excess of ±128 deg/s For accelerations in excess of ±4 g For accelerations in excess of ±8 g For rates in excess of ±32 deg/s For wind speed > 256 knots and < 5 knots DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3040 July 2011 . in navigation mode normal Not in navigation mode (IRS operation) For P/N 145130-3000 only.

this new model will be evaluated by NG LITEF to determine the changes in respect to the models in use. In Navigation Mode the system algebraically adds computed magnetic variation from the current WMM to true heading and true track to produce magnetic heading and magnetic track angle.5 degrees of deviation in areas of aircraft operation. If the evaluation of the latest MagVar model against the models in use leads to a difference of more than ±2. it is recommended to update the magnetic model. The current model (at the date this manual has been published) for all LCR-100 versions except 145130-3000 is WWM-2005 (published 12/2004). A Service Information Letter (SIL) will be issued for any NOAA magnetic model update which contains the results of the evaluation of the models. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3041 July 2011 . Locations for updating of the WMM: The update of the WMM used by the LCR-100 to the latest issue must be accomplished either at Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH authorized service stations or at Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH site itself. Evaluation of the latest WMM The WMM is updated every 5 years.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 5 Use of the World Magnetic Model The LCR-100 uses the NOAA World Magnetic Field Model (WMM). The update of the WMM to the current one can be done at any time. The current model for LCR-100 version with P/N 145130-3000 is WWM-2010 (published 01/2010). Time constrains There are no time constrains. If an updated model is available from NOAA.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 3 Page 3042 July 2011 .

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 SECTION 4 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G TITLE PAGE SECTION 4 July 2011 .

.

1 Nm. The installation of the mounting tray is described in section 3. this section must be read thoroughly and understood. Mishandling could cause damage to sensitive components of the AHRU.1. Failure to observe these procedures could lead to unnecessary damage to the equipment.4 + 0. CAUTION Before any work is carried out on the AHRS which involves the installation and removal of the AHRU. Handle Units with care at all times. always pull all AHRS-related aircraft circuit breakers out (off) before removing any unit. tighten the connector screws with a maximum torque of 0.g. CAUTION To prevent possible damage to the AHRS. CAUTION To prevent possible damage to the AHRS. The AHRUs may be located in the aircraft electronics rack or in an avionics bay.5 + 0.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1 General This section provides installation and removal procedures for the AHRUs. respectively 3. paragraph 2. e. to the gasket on the mounting tray.9 in-lbs! Figure 4-1 Fixing Torque for Connectors DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 4 Page 4001 July 2011 .

LCR-100 mounting tray: Tighten nut with torque 7 -0. (When the IDM is re-attached to J5 the existing compass compensation and mounting alignment correction constants are supplied to the replacement AHRU. Engage hold-down fastener. Connect J1 through J6 (refer to Figure 1-7).Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 2 Installation of the AHRU For the following descriptions refer to Figure 4-2: CAUTION When performing the following step. Ensure that no tools or other items are in Mounting Tray or plenum. CAUTION Failure to perform the following step may cause damage to the AHRU connectors and/or mating connectors. and that no foreign objects are in AHRU connectors and/or mating connectors.) LCR-92/93 mounting tray: Tighten self-torquing hold-down fastener by turning clockwise until it is tight.0 in-lbs) (wrench size 10 mm). (1) Remove cap plugs from AHRU external connectors. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Ensure that all connector pins are undamaged and straight. Install AHRU on the tray as shown in Figure 4-2 (view 2 and 3).5 Nm (62 -4. Ensure that all AHRS-related circuit breakers are off. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 4 Page 4002 July 2011 . do not use sharp-pointed tools to pry out the plug caps because the tools may pierce the plug cap and damage the connector pins.

40 mm before the rear end of the Tray*. Push it into the Tray with the utmost care so as not to cause damage to the gasket and stop approx. AHRU Hold-Down Fastener closed LIT00024R3 Keyway Figure 4-2 Installation of the AHRU DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 4 Page 4003 July 2011 . this can cause damage! Keyway Mounting Surface approx.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Rear end Front end View1 Do not slide AHRU over the gasket. 40 Gasket Tray Mounting Surface Hold-Down Fastener opened View 2 Hold AHRU in a flat angle. * In this position the keyway of the AHRU is in the center of the rear mounting surface of the tray. Take care not to jam AHRU! AHRU View 4 Secure AHRU with the hold-down fastener. Lower AHRU on the mounting surfaces in this position. AHRU View 3 Keyway Push the keyway of the AHRU carefully into the keyway of the tray.

DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 4 Page 4004 July 2011 . Disconnect J1 through J6. LCR-92/93 mounting tray: Loosen self-torquing hold-down fastener securing AHRU in mounting tray by turning counterclockwise. (4) Remove AHRU from the tray as shown in Figure 4-3. (Leave IDM secured to the mounting tray by the retaining cable).Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 3 Removal of the AHRU For the following descriptions refer to Figure 4-3: (1) (2) (3) Pull all AHRU-related circuit breakers out (off). LCR-100 mounting tray: Loosen nut (wrench size 10 mm) and disengage hold-down fastener.

40 mm you can lift the upper end a little bit and push out the AHRU in a flat angle. this can cause damage! Keyway Mounting Surface Gasket Tray Mounting Surface Hold-Down Fastener opened View 2 Open the hold-down fastener Push the AHRU carefully out of the trays keyway. Remove AHRU from the tray with the utmost care so as not to cause damage to the gasket. AHRU Keyway View 4 Tray with removed AHRU Gasket Tray Hold-Down Fastener opened LIT00024R3 Figure 4-3 Removal of the AHRU DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 4 Page 4005 July 2011 . 40 View 3 After approx.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Rear end Front end View 1 Do not slide AHRU over the gasket. Keyway AHRU approx.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 4 Page 4006 July 2011 .

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 SECTION 5 STORAGE/PACKAGING/TRANSPORTATION DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G TITLE PAGE SECTION 5 July 2011 .

.

reusable shipping containers are designated as follows: Category 1 Reusable for a minimum of 100 round-trips Category 2 Reusable for a minimum of 10 round-trips Category 3 (1) Reusable for a minimum of 1 round-trip (when used for repairable parts. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 5 Page 5001 July 2011 . handling. and storage up to the moment of installation. The procedures contain recommended specifications.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 1 General This section provides storage. CAUTION Handle Units with care at all times. 2 Storage The LCR-100 shall be stored in a dry dust free area. and to repeat the cycle for the life of the item. packaging and transportation procedures for the AHRU. Dust free conditions can be ensured by storing the LCR-100 in the original shipping container. For the purpose of this specification. but their use is not mandatory. Mishandling could cause damage to sensitive components of the AHRU. refer to chapter 8 of ATA 300) 1) applicable to LCR-100 Packaging (References in accordance with ATA 300) The above categories are differentiated by materials used in the container construction and tests described in specification ATA 300. This requirement is specified because of the need to protect the item through shipment. 3 NOTE Items subjected to electrostatic damage shall be packaged in anti-static containers or wraps. All repairable items which may be removed from the aircraft and economically restored to a fully serviceable condition shall be shipped to an airline customer in reusable containers.

handling and storage aspects of components shall be provided by the manufacturer because of its superior knowledge of its products. 3. marked. marked and/or labeled in accordance with Figure 5-2. shipping. vapors. width and depth or detailed outline drawings showing all external dimensions if required due to a peculiar part configuration) and gross weight along with any applicable information required. Items which are easily damaged when subjected to shock or Vibration found in normal transportation must have those fragility characteristics (the amount of "G" force to which an item can be subjected without causing damage) documented by the manufacturer. Assemblies or components which generate a magnetic field must be packaged and properly spaced in shielding materials which will prevent the magnetic field from adversely affecting adjacent items and instrumentation. the container shall provide necessary shielding from outside sources. documented and in condition for transport in compliance with applicable regulations and instructions. 4 Transportation (References in accordance with ATA 300) The units shipped from the manufacturer to the customer shall be properly classified and described. This information should be made available sufficiently in advance of delivery of the unit to the customer to permit orderly physical and financial planning. In addition.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Consideration of the special packaging. Items subject to electrostatic damage shall be packaged. This includes damage boundary curves or a recommended G-Ievels and acceleration for a given drop height. labeled. Manufacturers shall publish and provide size (length. Marking of each unit package shall be in accordance with Figure 5-1. hazardous materials classification. This information shall include shock sensitivity. gases. when a part is susceptible to damage from magnetic fields. or dust shall be packaged in air-tight containers or wraps constructed of inert materials treated to neutralize any captive air with non-toxic results. electrostatic discharge sensitivity. etc. magnetic field sensitivity. corrosion or chemical reaction in storage by exposure to liquids. DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 5 Page 5002 July 2011 .1 Special Packaging Requirements The manufacturer of the unit or component shall establish and inform the customers of the shelf life and storage instructions of its products. Items subject to abnormal deterioration. packaged.

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 STATIC SENSITIVE OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING ELECTROS TATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES CAUTION CIRCUIT CARD CONDUCTIVE PLASTIC BAG POLYETHYLENE PADDED POUCH CARTON CIRCUIT CARD CONDUCTIVE PADDED POUCH CARTON CIRCUIT CARD CONDUCTIVE BAG FOAM LINED BOX CONDUCTIVE PROTECTIVE CAPS AVIONIC ITEM (METAL-ENCASED) Figure 5-1 Packaging of Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 5 Page 5003 July 2011 .

Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 Figure 5-2 Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Device Labels (typical examples) DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G SECTION 5 Page 5004 July 2011 .

Zip Code. Country FAX No.de DOCUMENT No: 145130-0000-840 REV G REPORT. State (Province). POSSIBLE DATA ERROR Page No. Page 1/2 July 2011 . email address: AHRS. Installation/Maintenance INSTALLATION  GEM  OTHER ______________ READER INFORMATION Please check all that apply:  OEM  Dealer  End-User  Other (Please specify) _______________________________________ Company Name City. Paragraph Figure No.Support@ng-litef. Description of Possible Data Error Please mail or FAX completed form to Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH. Document Type X IMI Issue Date X July 2011 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) LCR-100 P/N: 145130. Germany FAX: ++49 761 4901 773. PUBLICATION INFORMATION Pub. Original Issue? X Yes  No Revision No. No.Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH INSTALLATION/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION 145130-xxxx – LCR-100 REPORT OF POSSIBLE DATA ERROR To help us upgrading the quality of our publications. Table No. Northrop Grumman LITEF GmbH encourages any report of a possible data error that will improve future editions of this publication. Your Name (optional) Street Address Telephone No. Pub. Title 145130-0000-840 ATA No.